Vigor2862 Series VDSL2 Security Firewall User’s Guide Version: 1.5 Firmware Version: V3.9.
Copyrights © All rights reserved. This publication contains information that is protected by copyright. No part may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language without written permission from the copyright holders. Trademarks The following trademarks are used in this document: Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corp. Windows, Windows 95, 98, Me, NT, 2000, XP, Vista, 7 and Explorer are trademarks of Microsoft Corp.
Table of Contents Part I Installation .................................................................................................................i I-1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 1 I-1-1 Indicators and Connectors .................................................................................................. 2 I-1-1-1 Vigor2862 / Vigor2862B / Vigor2862L ...............................
II-1-2-4 Details Page for MPoA/Static or Dynamic IP in WAN1 (Physical Mode: ADSL) .88 II-1-2-5 Details Page for PPPoE in WAN2 (Physical Mode: Ethernet) ......................92 II-1-2-6 Details Page for Static or Dynamic IP in WAN2 (Physical Mode: Ethernet).....94 II-1-2-7 Details Page for PPTP/L2TP in WAN2 (Physical Mode: Ethernet) ................98 II-1-2-8 Details Page for Static or Dynamic IP in WAN2 (Physical Mode: Wireless 2.4G) ........................................................................
II-5-2 LAN DNS / DNS Forwarding .......................................................................................... 195 II-5-3 DNS Security .................................................................................................................. 198 II-5-3-1 General Setup .......................................................................... 198 II-5-3-2 Domain Diagnose ....................................................................... 199 II-5-4 Schedule............................
II-7-2 SMS Inbox ...................................................................................................................... 278 II-7-3 Send SMS ...................................................................................................................... 281 II-7-4 Router Commands ......................................................................................................... 282 II-7-5 Status ......................................................................................
V-1-1 VPN Client Wizard ......................................................................................................... 351 V-1-2 VPN Server Wizard ........................................................................................................ 358 V-1-3 Remote Access Control ................................................................................................. 362 V-1-4 PPP General Setup............................................................................................
VI-2-3 URL Content Filter Profile ............................................................................................. 457 VI-2-4 Web Content Filter Profile ............................................................................................. 461 VI-2-5 DNS Filter Profile .......................................................................................................... 465 Application Notes .............................................................................................
VII-3-3 User Group................................................................................................................... 545 VII-3-4 User Online Status ....................................................................................................... 546 Application Notes ..................................................................................................................... 548 A-1 How to authenticate clients via User Management ...................................
VII-6-12 Load Balance ............................................................................................................. 628 VII-6-13 Function Support List ................................................................................................. 630 Application Notes ..................................................................................................................... 631 A-1 How to use AP Management function (in Vigor2862) to check AP status and deploy WLAN profile .......
VIII-2-3 File Explorer ................................................................................................................ 689 VIII-2-4 USB Device Status...................................................................................................... 690 VIII-2-5 Temperature Sensor ................................................................................................... 691 VIII-2-6 Modem Support List ...............................................................................
Index ...............................................................................................................................
Part I Installation This part will introduce Vigor router and guide to install the device in hardware and software.
I-1 Introduction This is a generic International version of the user guide. Specification, compatibility and features vary by region. For specific user guides suitable for your region or product, please contact local distributor. Vigor2862 series is a VDSL2 router. It integrates IP layer QoS, NAT session/bandwidth management to help users control works well with large bandwidth.
I-1-1 Indicators and Connectors Before you use the Vigor router, please get acquainted with the LED indicators and connectors first. I-1-1-1 Vigor2862 / Vigor2862B / Vigor2862L LED ACT (Activity) WAN2 QoS USB1~2 / USB DSL/DSL 1/2 Status Off Blinking On Off Blinking On Off On Off Blinking On Blinking WCF On LTE Off On Off Blinking VPN DMZ 2 On Off Blinking On Explanation The router is powered off. The router is powered on and running normally. Internet connection is ready.
Off Blinking The DMZ function is disabled. The data is transmitting. On Off Blinking On Off On Off Blinking On Off The port is connected. The port is disconnected. The data is transmitting. The port is connected with 1000Mbps. The port is connected with 10/100Mbps The port is connected. The port is disconnected. The data is transmitting. The port is connected with 1000Mbps.
I-1-1-2 Vigor2862n/Vigor2862ac/Vigor2862Bn/ Vigor2862Ln / Vigor2862Lac LED ACT (Activity) WAN2 QoS USB DSL / DSL 1/2 4 Status Off Blinking On Off Blinking On Off On Off Blinking On Blinking WCF On LTE Off On Off Explanation The router is powered off. The router is powered on and running normally. Internet connection is ready. Internet connection is not ready. The data is transmitting. The QoS function is active. The QoS function is inactive. USB device is connected and ready for use.
Blinking 2.4G/5G/WLAN On Off Blinking On Off Blinking Slowly: LTE device is in dialing up. Quickly: The data is transmitting. 2.4G/5G: Wireless access point with bandwidth of 2.4GHz/5GHz is ready. WLAN: Wireless access point is ready. Wireless function is disabled. It will blink slowly while wireless traffic goes through. ACT and WLAN LEDs blink quickly and simultaneously when WPS is working, and will return to normal condition after two minutes. (You need to setup WPS within 2 minutes.
Switch on Rear Side Interface Wireless LAN ON/OFF/WPS Factory Reset USB 1~2 DSL / DSL 1/2 LAN P1~P4 P5 / WAN2 PWR ON/OFF 6 (Available for Vigor2862Ln/Lac) Description For Vigor2862n/Vigor2862Bn : Press the button and release it within 2 seconds. When the wireless function is ready, the green LED will be on. Press the button and release it within 2 seconds to turn off the WLAN function. When the wireless function is not ready, the LED will be off.
I-1-1-3 Vigor2862Vac LED ACT (Activity) USB WAN2 DSL 2.4G/5G Status Off Blinking On Off Blinking On Off Blinking On Blinking Off On Off Blinking Explanation The router is powered off. The router is powered on and running normally. USB device is connected and ready for use. No USB device is connected. The data is transmitting. Internet connection is ready. Internet connection is not ready. The data is transmitting. The router is ready to access Internet through DSL link.
Interface Wireless LAN ON/OFF/WPS Factory Reset DSL LAN P1~P4 P5 / WAN2 USB 1~2 Phone 1/2 Line PWR ON/OFF 8 Description Wireless band will be switched /changed according to the button pressed and released. For example, 2.4G (On) and 5G (On) – in default. 2.4G (Off) and 5G (On) – pressed and released the button once. 2.4G (On) and 5G (Off) – pressed and released the button twice. 2.4G (Off) and 5G (Off) – pressed and released the button three times.
I-1-2 Notes for Antenna Installation (for “L” model) Magnetic antenna must be installed on the extension base before connecting to Vigor router. Extension Base There are two mounting holes for installing antennas with extension base on Vigor router. Please install them as shown below. Major Signal Transmitted Hole SIM Card Slot Extension Base Note, if only one antenna shall be installed, please use the mounting hole (major signal transmitted hole) near to the SIM card slot.
While installing the SIM card into the card slot, note that back plate of the SIM card slot must be removed first and the direction of card notch must be on the left side. There are two types of antennas provided for Vigor2862Ln/Vigor2862Lac, which must be installed in different locations carefully and correctly. Wrong installation might cause bad signal of wireless connection. Therefore, pay attention to the installation of antennas by referring to the following illustration.
I-2 Hardware Installation I-2-1 Installing Vigor Router Before starting to configure the router, you have to connect your devices correctly. 1. Connect the DSL interface to the land line jack with a DSL line cable. Connect the cable Modem/DSL Modem/Media Converter to the WAN port of router with Ethernet cable (RJ-45). 2. Connect one end of an Ethernet cable (RJ-45) to one of the LAN ports of the router and the other end of the cable (RJ-45) into the Ethernet port on your computer. 3.
I-2-2 Wall-Mounted Installation Vigor router has keyhole type mounting slots on the underside. 1. A template is provided on the Vigor router packaging box to enable you to space the screws correctly on the wall. 2. Place the template on the wall and drill the holes according to the recommended instruction. 3. Fit screws into the wall using the appropriate type of wall plug. Info 4. 12 The recommended drill diameter shall be 6.5mm (1/4”).
I-2-3 Installing USB Printer to Vigor Router You can install a printer onto the router for sharing printing. All the PCs connected this router can print documents via the router. The example provided here is made based on Windows 7. For other Windows system, please visit www.DrayTek.com. Before using it, please follow the steps below to configure settings for connected computers (or wireless clients). 1. Connect the printer with the router through USB/parallel port. 2.
14 4. A dialog will appear. Click Add a local printer and click Next. 5. In this dialog, choose Create a new port. In the field of Type of port, use the drop down list to select Standard TCP/IP Port. Then, click Next.
6. In the following dialog, type 192.168.1.1 (router’s LAN IP) in the field of Hostname or IP Address and type 192.168.1.1 as the Port name. Then, click Next. 7. Click Standard and choose Generic Network Card.
16 8. Now, your system will ask you to choose right name of the printer that you installed onto the router. Such step can make correct driver loaded onto your PC. When you finish the selection, click Next. 9. Type a name for the chosen printer. Click Next.
10. Choose Do not share this printer and click Next. 11. Then, in the following dialog, click Finish.
12. The new printer has been added and displayed under Printers and Faxes. Click the new printer icon and click Printer server properties. 13. Edit the property of the new printer you have added by clicking Configure Port.
14. Select "LPR" on Protocol, type p1 (number 1) as Queue Name. Then click OK. Next please refer to the red rectangle for choosing the correct protocol and LPR name. The printer can be used for printing now. Most of the printers with different manufacturers are compatible with vigor router. Info Some printers with the fax/scanning or other additional functions are not supported. Vigor router supports printing request from computers via LAN ports but not WAN port.
I-3 Accessing Web Page 1. Make sure your PC connects to the router correctly. You may either simply set up your computer to get IP dynamically from the router or set up the IP address of the computer to be the same subnet as the default IP address of Vigor router 192.168.1.1. For the detailed information, please refer to the later section - Trouble Shooting of the guide. 2. Open a web browser on your PC and type http://192.168.1.1. The following window will be open to ask for username and password. 3.
4. Now, the Main Screen will appear. Take Vigor2862ac/Vigor2862Vac as an example. Info 5. The home page will be different slightly in accordance with the type of the router you have. The web page can be logged out according to the chosen condition. The default setting is Auto Logout, which means the web configuration system will logout after 5 minutes without any operation. Change the setting for your necessity.
I-4 Changing Password Please change the password for the original security of the router. 1. Open a web browser on your PC and type http://192.168.1.1. A pop-up window will open to ask for username and password. 2. Please type “admin/admin” as Username/Password for accessing into the web user interface with admin mode. 3. Go to System Maintenance page and choose Administrator Password. 4. Enter the login password (the default is “admin”) on the field of Old Password.
5. Now, the password has been changed. Next time, use the new password to access the Web user interface for this router. Info Vigor2862 Series User’s Guide Even the password is changed, the Username for logging onto the web user interface is still “admin”.
I-5 Dashboard Dashboard shows the connection status including System Information, IPv4 Internet Access, IPv6 Internet Access, Interface (physical connection), Security and Quick Access. Click Dashboard from the main menu on the left side of the main page. A web page with default selections will be displayed on the screen.
I-5-1 Virtual Panel On the top of the Dashboard, a virtual panel (simulating the physical panel of the router) displays the physical interface connection. It will be refreshed every five seconds. When you move and click the mouse cursor on LEDs (except ACT), USB ports, VDSL/ADSL, WAN2, or LAN1 – LAN6, related web setting page will be open for you to configure if required. Port Color Description USB Black No USB device is connected. Green A USB device is connected. Black No VDSL/ADSL connection.
I-5-2 Name with a Link A name with a link (e.g., Router Name, Current Time, WAN1~4 and etc.) below means you can click it to open the configuration page for modification.
I-5-3 Quick Access for Common Used Menu All the menu items can be accessed and arranged orderly on the left side of the main page for your request. However, some important and common used menu items which can be accessed in a quick way just for convenience. Look at the right side of the Dashboard. You will find a group of common used functions grouped under Quick Access.
Note that there is a plus ( ) icon located on the left side of VPN/LAN. Click it to review the VPN connection(s) used presently. Host connected physically to the router via LAN port(s) will be displayed with green circles in the field of Connected. All of the hosts (including wireless clients) displayed with Host ID, IP Address and MAC address indicates that the traffic would be transmitted through LAN port(s) and then the WAN port. The purpose is to perform the traffic monitor of the host(s).
I-5-5 Web Console It is not necessary to use the telnet command via DOS prompt. The changes made by using web console have the same effects as modified through web user interface. The functions/settings modified under Web Console also can be reviewed on the web user interface. Click the Web Console icon on the top of the main screen to open the following screen.
I-5-6 Config Backup There is one way to store current used settings quickly by clicking the Config Backup icon. It allows you to backup current settings as a file. Such configuration file can be restored by using System Maintenance>>Configuration Backup. I-5-7 Logout Click this icon to exit the web user interface.
I-5-8 Online Status I-5-8-1 Physical Connection Such page displays the physical connection status such as LAN connection status, WAN connection status, ADSL information, and so on.
Physical Connection for IPv6 Protocol Detailed explanation (for IPv4) is shown below: 32 Item Description LAN Status Primary DNS-Displays the primary DNS server address for WAN interface. Secondary DNS -Displays the secondary DNS server address for WAN interface. IP Address-Displays the IP address of the LAN interface. TX Packets-Displays the total transmitted packets at the LAN interface. RX Packets-Displays the total received packets at the LAN interface.
Item Description interface. Detailed explanation (for IPv6) is shown below: Item Description LAN Status IP Address- Displays the IPv6 address of the LAN interface.. TX Packets-Displays the total transmitted packets at the LAN interface. RX Packets-Displays the total received packets at the LAN interface. TX Bytes - Displays the speed of transmitted octets at the LAN interface. RX Bytes - Displays the speed of received octets at the LAN interface.
I-6 Quick Start Wizard Quick Start Wizard can help you to deploy and use the router easily and quickly. Go to Wizards>>Quick Start Wizard. The first screen of Quick Start Wizard is entering login password. After typing the password, please click Next. On the next page as shown below, please select the WAN interface that you use. If DSL interface is used, please choose WAN1; if Ethernet interface is used, please choose WAN2; if 3G USB modem is used, please choose WAN3 or WAN4. Then click Next for next step.
I-6-1 For WAN1 (ADSL/VDSL2) WAN1 is specified for ADSL or VDSL2 connection. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Display Name Type a name to identify such WAN. VLAN Tag insertion (VDSL2)/(ADSL) The settings configured in this field are available for WAN1 and WAN2. Enable – Enable the function of VLAN with tag. The router will add specific VLAN number to all packets on the WAN while sending them out.
PPPoE/PPPoA 1. Choose WAN1 as WAN Interface and click the Next button; you will get the following page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Protocol There are two modes offered for you to choose for WAN1 interface. Choose PPPoE/PPPoA as the protocol. 36 For ADSL Only Such field is provided for ADSL only. You have to choose encapsulation and type the values for VPI and VCI. Or, click Auto detect to find out the best values. Fixed IP Click Yes to enable Fixed IP feature.
2. Back Click it to return to previous setting page. Next Click it to get into the next setting page. Cancel Click it to give up the quick start wizard. After finished the above settings, simply click Next. Manually enter the Username/Password provided by your ISP Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Service Name (Optional) Enter the description of the specific network service. Username Assign a specific valid user name provided by the ISP.
38 3. After finished the above settings, click Next for viewing summary of such connection. 4. Click Finish. A page of Quick Start Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear. Then, the system status of this protocol will be shown. 5. Now, you can enjoy surfing on the Internet.
MPoA / Static or Dynamic IP 1. Choose WAN1 as WAN Interface and click the Next button; you will get the following page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Protocol There are two modes offered for you to choose for WAN1 interface. Choose MPoA / Static or Dynamic IP as the protocol. For ADSL Only Such field is provided for ADSL only. You have to choose encapsulation and type the values for VPI and VCI. Or, click Auto detect to find out the best values.
40 Secondary DNS Type in secondary IP address for necessity in the future. Back Click it to return to previous setting page. Next Click it to get into the next setting page. Cancel Click it to give up the quick start wizard. 2. Please type in the IP address/mask/gateway information originally provided by your ISP. Then click Next for viewing summary of such connection. 3. Click Finish. A page of Quick Start Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear. Then, the system status of this protocol will be shown.
I-6-2 For WAN2 (Ethernet)/(Wireless 2.4G) WAN2 can be configured for physical mode of Ethernet or Wireless 2.4G. If you choose Ethernet WAN2, please specify a physical type. Then, click Next. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Display Name Type a name for the router. Physical Mode Choose Ethernet or Wireless based on the physical connection. Choose Wireless 2.4G if you want to use wireless station mode to access Internet.
Ethernet WAN2 - PPPoE 1. Choose WAN2 as the WAN Interface and choose Ethernet as the Physical Mode. Click the Next button. The following page will be open for you to specify Internet Access Type. 2. Click PPPoE as the Internet Access Type. Then click Next to continue. Available settings are explained as follows: 42 Item Description Service Name (Optional) Enter the description of the specific network service. Username Assign a specific valid user name provided by the ISP.
Item Description Confirm Password Retype the password. Back Click it to return to previous setting page. Next Click it to get into the next setting page. Cancel Click it to give up the quick start wizard. 3. Please manually enter the Username/Password provided by your ISP. Click Next for viewing summary of such connection. 4. Click Finish. A page of Quick Start Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear. Then, the system status of this protocol will be shown. 5.
Ethernet WAN2 - PPTP/L2TP 1. Choose WAN2 as the WAN Interface and choose Ethernet as the Physical Mode. Click the Next button. The following page will be open for you to specify Internet Access Type. 2. Click PPTP/L2TP as the Internet Access Type. Then click Next to continue. Available settings are explained as follows: 44 Item Description Username Assign a specific valid user name provided by the ISP. Note: The maximum length of the user name you can set is 63 characters.
characters. Confirm Password Retype the password. WAN IP Configuration Obtain an IP address automatically – The router will get an IP address automatically from DHCP server. Specify an IP address – You have to type relational settings manually. IP Address - Type the IP address. Subnet Mask – Type the subnet mask. Gateway – Type the IP address of the gateway. Primary DNS – Type in the primary IP address for the router. Second DNS – Type in secondary IP address for necessity in the future.
Ethernet WAN2 - Static IP 1. Choose WAN2 as the WAN Interface and choose Ethernet as the Physical Mode. Click the Next button. The following page will be open for you to specify Internet Access Type. 2. Click Static IP as the Internet Access type. Simply click Next to continue. Available settings are explained as follows: 46 Item Description WAN IP Type the IP address. Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask. Gateway Type the IP address of gateway.
Cancel Click it to give up the quick start wizard. 3. Please type in the IP address information originally provided by your ISP. Then click Next for next step. 4. Click Finish. A page of Quick Start Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear. Then, the system status of this protocol will be shown. 5. Now, you can enjoy surfing on the Internet. Ethernet WAN2 - DHCP 1. Choose WAN2 as the WAN Interface and choose Ethernet as the Physical Mode. Click the Next button.
Available settings are explained as follows: 3. 48 Item Description Host Name Type the name of the host. Note: The maximum length of the host name you can set is 39 characters. MAC Some Cable service providers specify a specific MAC address for access authentication. In such cases you need to enter the MAC address. Back Click it to return to previous setting page. Next Click it to get into the next setting page. Cancel Click it to give up the quick start wizard.
4. Click Finish. A page of Quick Start Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear. Then, the system status of this protocol will be shown. 5. Now, you can enjoy surfing on the Internet. Wireless (2.4G) WAN2 - Static IP 1. Choose WAN2 as the WAN Interface and choose Wireless (2.4G) as the Physical Mode. Click the Next button. The following page will be open for you to specify Internet Access Type. 2. Click Static IP as the Internet Access Type. Simply click Next to continue.
3. Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask. Gateway Type the IP address of gateway. Back Click it to return to previous setting page. Next Click it to get into the next setting page. Cancel Click it to give up the quick start wizard. Please type in the IP address information according to the settings of your Wireless AP. Then click Next for next step. Available settings are explained as follows: 50 Item Description SSID The identification of the Wireless AP.
4. Click the AP Discovery button to choose your Wireless AP. You can also set the Wireless AP information directly and skip the next 2 steps. 5. Click the Scan button of the popup window and wait for a few seconds. 6. Select your Wireless AP and click the Add to button.
52 7. All settings except the encryption key will be filled automatically. If the Security Mode is WEP, type in the WEP Keys. If the Security Mode is WPA/PSK or WPA2/PSK, type in the Pass Phrase. Then click Next for next step. 8. Click Finish. A page of Quick Start Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear. Then, the system status of this protocol will be shown. 9. Now, you can enjoy surfing on the Internet.
Wireless (2.4G) WAN2 - DHCP 1. Choose WAN2 as the WAN Interface and choose Wireless (2.4G) as the Physical Mode. Click the Next button. The following page will be open for you to specify Internet Access Type. 2. Click DHCP as the Internet Access type. Simply click Next to continue. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description SSID The identification of the Wireless AP. MAC Address (Optional) The MAC Address of the Wireless AP. Channel The channel of frequency of the Wireless AP.
54 without any encryption mechanism. WEP – The Router connects to the wireless AP as a WEP client and the encryption key should be entered in WEP Key. WPA/PSK – The Router connects to the wireless AP as a WPA client and the encryption key should be entered in PSK. WPA2/PSK – The Router connects to the wireless AP as a WPA2 client and the encryption key should be entered in PSK. Back Click it to return to previous setting page. Next Click it to get into the next setting page.
5. Select your Wireless AP and click the Add to button. 6. All settings except the encryption key will be filled automatically. If the Security Mode is WEP, type in the WEP Keys. If the Security Mode is WPA/PSK or WPA2/PSK, type in the Pass Phrase. Then click Next for next step. 7. Click Finish. A page of Quick Start Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear. Then, the system status of this protocol will be shown. Now, you can enjoy surfing on the Internet.
I-6-3 For WAN3/WAN4 (USB) WAN3/WAN4 is dedicated to physical mode in USB. 1. Choose WAN3/WAN4 as WAN Interface. 2. Then, click Next for getting the following page. Available settings are explained as follows: 56 Item Description Internet Access Choose one of the selections as the protocol of accessing the internet. 3G/4G USB Modem (PPP mode) SIM Pin code –Type PIN code of the SIM card that will be used to access Internet. The maximum length of the pin code you can set is 15 characters.
the string you can set is 47 characters. APN Name – APN means Access Point Name which is provided and required by some ISPs. Type the name and click Apply. 3G/4G USB Modem (DHCP mode) SIM Pin code – Type PIN code of the SIM card that will be used to access Internet. Network Mode – Force Vigor router to connect Internet with the mode specified here. If you choose 4G/3G/2G as network mode, the router will choose a suitable one according to the actual wireless signal automatically.
I-7 Service Activation Wizard Service Activation Wizard can guide you to activate WCF service (Web Content Filter) with a quick and easy way. For the Service Activation Wizard is only available for admin operation, therefore, please type “admin/admin” on Username/Password while Logging into the web user interface. Service Activation Wizard is a tool which allows you to use trial version of WCF directly without accessing into the server (MyVigor) located on http://myvigor.draytek.com.
Info BPjM is web content filter (WCF) for German Speaking users. It is ideal for your family to provide more Internet security for youngsters. DT-APPE, developed by DrayTek, offers a mechanism to upgrade APPE signature automatically. DT-DDNS, developed by DrayTek, offers one year free charge service of dynamic DNS service for internal use. 3. Setting confirmation page will be displayed as follows, please click Activate. Info 4.
I-8 Registering Vigor Router You have finished the configuration of Quick Start Wizard and you can surf the Internet at any time. Now it is the time to register your Vigor router to MyVigor website for getting more service. Please follow the steps below to finish the router registration. 60 1 Please login the web configuration interface of Vigor router by typing “admin/admin” as User Name / Password. 2 Click Support Area>>Production Registration from the home page.
Info If you haven’t an accessing account, please refer to section Creating an Account for MyVigor to create your own one. Please read the articles on the Agreement regarding user rights carefully while creating a user account. 4 The following page will be displayed after you logging in MyVigor. Type a nickname for the router, then click Add. 5 When the following page appears, your router information has been added to the database.
6 62 After clicking OK, you will see the following page. Your router has been registered to myvigor website successfully.
Part II Connectivity It means wide area network. Public IP will be used in WAN. It means local area network. Private IP will be used in LAN. Local Area Network (LAN) is a group of subnets regulated and ruled by router. The design of network structure is related to what type of public IP addresses coming from your ISP.
64 Vigor2862 Series User’s Guide
II-1 WAN It allows users to access Internet. Basics of Internet Protocol (IP) Network IP means Internet Protocol. Every device in an IP-based Network including routers, print server, and host PCs, needs an IP address to identify its location on the network. To avoid address conflicts, IP addresses are publicly registered with the Network Information Centre (NIC).
After connecting into the router, 3G/4G USB Modem will be regarded as the WAN3/WAN4 port. However, the original WAN1 and WAN2 still can be used and Load-Balance can be done in the router. Besides, 3G/4G USB Modem in WAN3/WAN4 also can be used as backup device. Therefore, when WAN1 and WAN2 are not available, the router will use 3.5G for supporting automatically. The supported 3G/4G USB Modem will be listed on DrayTek web site. Please visit www.draytek.com for more detailed information.
Web User Interface II-1-1 General Setup This section will introduce some general settings of Internet and explain the connection modes for WAN1, WAN2 and WAN3/WAN4 in details. This router supports multiple-WAN function. It allows users to access Internet and combine the bandwidth of the multiple WANs to speed up the transmission through the network. Each WAN port can connect to different ISPs, even if the ISPs use different technology to provide telecommunication service (such as DSL, Cable modem, etc.).
throughput might be reached; however, some web site may not open smoothly, especially the site need authentication, e.g., FTP. If you have no strong demand about speed test result, keep default settings as IP based. Index Click the WAN interface link under Index to access into the WAN configuration page. Enable V means such WAN interface is enabled and ready to be used. Physical Mode / Type Display the physical mode and physical type of such WAN interface.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Choose Yes to invoke the settings for this WAN interface. Choose No to disable the settings for this WAN interface. Display Name Type the description for such interface. Physical Mode Display the physical mode of such interface. If VDSL2 is detected, this field will display “VDSL2”; if ADSL is detected, it will display “ADSL”. DSL Mode Specify the physical mode (VDSL or ADSL) for such router manually.
Active Mode Choose Always On to make the WAN1 connection being activated always. Load Balance: Check this box to enable auto load balance function for such WAN interface. When the data traffic is large, the WAN interface with the function enabled will balance the data transmission automatically among all of the WAN interfaces in connection status. Failover – Choose it to make the WAN connection as a backup connection.
II-1-1-2 WAN2 (Ethernet)/(Wireless 2.4G/5G) WAN2 can be configured for physical mode of Ethernet or Wireless 2.4/5G. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Choose Yes to invoke the settings for this WAN interface. Choose No to disable the settings for this WAN interface. Display Name Type the description for such WAN interface. Physical Mode Choose Wireless 2.4G if you want to use wireless station mode to access Internet.
activated always. Load Balance: Check this box to enable auto load balance function for such WAN interface. When the data traffic is large, the WAN interface with the function enabled will balance the data transmission automatically among all of the WAN interfaces in connection status. Failover – Choose it to make the WAN connection as a backup connection. Active When WAN Failure – When the active WAN failed, such WAN will be activated as the main network connection.
II-1-1-3 WAN3/LTE/WAN4 (USB) To use 3G/4G network connection through 3G/4G USB Modem, please configure WAN3/LTE or WAN4 interface. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Choose Yes to invoke the settings for this WAN interface. Choose No to disable the settings for this WAN interface. Display Name Type the description for such WAN interface. Physical Mode Display the physical mode of such WAN interface.
activated always. Load Balance: Check this box to enable auto load balance function for such WAN interface. When the data traffic is large, the WAN interface with the function enabled will balance the data transmission automatically among all of the WAN interfaces in connection status. Failover – Choose it to make the WAN connection as a backup connection. Active When WAN Failure – When the active WAN failed, such WAN will be activated as the main network connection.
II-1-2 Internet Access For the router supports multi-WAN function, the users can set different WAN settings (for WAN1, WAN2, WAN3 or LTE, WAN4) for Internet Access. Due to different Physical Mode for WAN interface, the Access Mode for these connections also varies. Refer to the following figures for examples.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Index Display the WAN interface. Display Name It shows the name of the WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4 that entered in general setup. Physical Mode It shows the physical connection for WAN1(ADSL/VDSL2)/WAN2 (Ethernet/Wireless 2.4G)/WAN3 or LTE /WAN4 (3G/4G USB Modem) accroding to the real network connection. Access Mode Use the drop down list to choose a proper access mode. The details page of that mode will be popped up.
DataType – Choose the type (ASCII or Hex) for the data to be stored. Data – Type the content of the data to be processed by the function of DHCP option. Info If you choose to configure option 61 here, the detailed settings in WAN>>Interface Access will be overwritten. II-1-2-1 Details Page for PPPoE in WAN1 (Physical Mode: VDSL2) To choose PPPoE as the accessing protocol of the Internet, please select PPPoE from the WAN>>Internet Access >>WAN1 page. The following web page will be shown.
parameters according to the information provided by your ISP. Username – Type in the username provided by ISP in this field. Password – Type in the password provided by ISP in this field. Service Name – Type a name representing serive used. Separate Account for ADSL – In default, WAN1 supports VDSL2/ADSL and uses the same PPPoE account and password for connection. If required, you can configure another account and password for ADSL connection by checking this box.
calculate and get the suitable MTU value such as 1500, 1492, 1484 and etc., automatically. Detect – Click it to detect a suitable MTU value Accept– After clicking it, the detected value will be displayed in the field of MTU. PPP/MP Setup PPP Authentication – Select PAP only or PAP or CHAP for PPP. IP Assignment(IPCP) - Usually ISP dynamically assigns IP address to you each time you connect to it and request.
into Internet. Note: To have PPPoA Pass-through, please choose PPPoA protocol and check the box(es) here. The router will behave like a modem which only serves the PPPoE client on the LAN. That’s, the router will offer PPPoA dial-up connection. MAC Address Default MAC Address – You can use Default MAC Address or specify another MAC address by typing on the boxes of MAC Address for the router. Specify a MAC Address – Type the MAC address for the router manually.
Item Description Enable/Disable Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable, this function will be closed and all the settings that you adjusted in this page will be invalid. ADSL Modem Settings It is not necessary to configure settings in these fields for modem settings are prepared for ADSL only. IP Network Settings Obtain an IP address automatically – Click this button to obtain the IP address automatically.
DNS Server IP Address Type in the primary IP address for the router. If necessary, type in secondary IP address for necessity in the future. WAN Connection Detection Such function allows you to verify whether network connection is alive or not through ARP Detect or Ping Detect. Mode – Choose ARP Detect, Ping Detect or Always On for the system to execute for WAN detection. If you choose Ping Detect as the detection mode, you have to type required settings for the following items.
Path MTU to – Type the IP address as the specific transmit path. MTU size start from – Determine the starting point value of the packet. Default setting is 1500. MTU reduce size by– It determines the decreasing size of MTU value. For example, the number specified in this field is “8”. The maximum MTU size is “1500”. After clicking the “detect” button, the system will calculate and get the suitable MTU value such as 1500, 1492, 1484 and etc., automatically.
II-1-2-3 Details Page for PPPoE/PPPoA in WAN1 (Physical Mode: ADSL) Available settings are explained as follows: 84 Item Description Enable/Disable Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable, this function will be closed and all the settings that you adjusted in this page will be invalid. ADSL Modem Settings Set up the DSL parameters required by your ISP. These settings configured here are specified for ADSL only.
Modulation –Default setting is Multimode. Choose the one that fits the requirement of your router. ISP Access Setup Enter your allocated username, password and authentication parameters according to the information provided by your ISP. Username – Type in the username provided by ISP in this field. Password – Type in the password provided by ISP in this field. More Options –It shows optional settings for configuration. Service Name - Enter the description of the specific network service.
PPP/MP Setup 86 Path MTU to – Type the IP address as the specific transmit path. MTU size start from – Determine the starting point value of the packet. Default setting is 1500. MTU reduce size by– It determines the decreasing size of MTU value. For example, the number specified in this field is “8”. The maximum MTU size is “1500”. After clicking the “detect” button, the system will calculate and get the suitable MTU value such as 1500, 1492, 1484 and etc., automatically.
Dial-Out Schedule You can type in four sets of time schedule for your request. All the schedules can be set previously in Applications >> Schedule web page and you can use the number that you have set in that web page. PPPoE Pass-through The router offers PPPoE dial-up connection. Besides, you also can establish the PPPoE connection directly from local clients to your ISP via the Vigor router.
II-1-2-4 Details Page for MPoA/Static or Dynamic IP in WAN1 (Physical Mode: ADSL) MPoA is a specification that enables ATM services to be integrated with existing LANs, which use either Ethernet, token-ring or TCP/IP protocols. The goal of MPoA is to allow different LANs to send packets to each other via an ATM backbone. To use MPoA/Static or Dynamic IP as the accessing protocol of the Internet, select MPoA /Static or Dynamic IP from the WAN>>Internet Access >>WAN1 page. The following web page will appear.
provided by ISP. VPI - Type in the value provided by ISP. VCI - Type in the value provided by ISP. Modulation –Default setting is Multimode. Choose the one that fits the requirement of your router. IP Network Settings This group allows you to obtain an IP address automatically and allows you type in IP address manually. Obtain an IP address automatically – Click this button to obtain the IP address automatically. More Options - Click it to display router name and domain name items.
DNS Server IP Address Type in the primary IP address for the router. If necessary, type in secondary IP address for necessity in the future. WAN Connection Detection Such function allows you to verify whether network connection is alive or not through ARP Detect or Ping Detect. Mode – Choose Always on, ARP Detect or Ping Detect for the system to execute for WAN detection. If you choose Ping Detect as the detection mode, you have to type required settings for the following items.
Path MTU to – Type the IP address as the specific transmit path. MTU size start from – Determine the starting point value of the packet. Default setting is 1500. MTU reduce size by– It determines the decreasing size of MTU value. For example, the number specified in this field is “8”. The maximum MTU size is “1500”. After clicking the “detect” button, the system will calculate and get the suitable MTU value such as 1500, 1492, 1484 and etc., automatically.
II-1-2-5 Details Page for PPPoE in WAN2 (Physical Mode: Ethernet) To choose PPPoE as the accessing protocol of the Internet, please select PPPoE from the WAN>>Internet Access >>WAN2 page. The following web page will be shown. Available settings are explained as follows: 92 Item Description Enable/Disable Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable, this function will be closed and all the settings that you adjusted in this page will be invalid.
execute for WAN detection. If you choose Ping Detect as the detection mode, you have to type required settings for the following items. Primary/Secondary Ping IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you have to type Primary or Secondary IP address in this field for pinging. Ping Gateway IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you also can enable this setting to use current WAN gateway IP address for pinging.
Fixed IP Address – Type in a fixed IP address. WAN IP Alias - If you have multiple public IP addresses and would like to utilize them on the WAN interface, please use WAN IP Alias. You can set up to 32 public IP addresses other than the current one you are using. Type the additional WAN IP address and check the Enable box. Then click OK to exit the dialog. Dial-Out Schedule Index (1-15) in Schedule Setup - You can type in four sets of time schedule for your request.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable / Disable Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable, this function will be closed and all the settings that you adjusted in this page will be invalid. IP Network Settings This group allows you to obtain an IP address automatically and allows you type in IP address manually. Obtain an IP address automatically – Click this button to obtain the IP address automatically if you want to use Dynamic IP mode.
63 characters. Password: Type a password. The maximum length of the password you can set is 62 characters. Specify an IP address – Click this radio button to specify some data if you want to use Static IP mode. IP Address: Type the IP address. Subnet Mask: Type the subnet mask. Gateway IP Address: Type the gateway IP address. WAN IP Alias - If you have multiple public IP addresses and would like to utilize them on the WAN interface, please use WAN IP Alias.
MTU size start from – Determine the starting point value of the packet. Default setting is 1500. MTU reduce size by – It determines the decreasing size of MTU value. For example, the number specified in this field is “8”. The maximum MTU size is “1500”. After clicking the “detect” button, the system will calculate and get the suitable MTU value such as 1500, 1492, 1484 and etc., automatically.
II-1-2-7 Details Page for PPTP/L2TP in WAN2 (Physical Mode: Ethernet) To use PPTP/L2TP as the accessing protocol of the internet, please click the PPTP/L2TP tab. The following web page will be shown. Available settings are explained as follows: 98 Item Description PPTP/L2TP Enable PPTP- Click this radio button to enable a PPTP client to establish a tunnel to a DSL modem on the WAN interface.
path. Click Detect to open the following dialog. Path MTU to – Type the IP address as the specific transmit path. MTU size start from – Determine the starting point value of the packet. Default setting is 1500. MTU reduce size by– It determines the decreasing size of MTU value. For example, the number specified in this field is “8”. The maximum MTU size is “1500”. After clicking the “detect” button, the system will calculate and get the suitable MTU value such as 1500, 1492, 1484 and etc.
II-1-2-8 Details Page for Static or Dynamic IP in WAN2 (Physical Mode: Wireless 2.4G) When Wireless 2.4G is selected as Physical Mode, WAN2 uses wireless station mode to access Internet. The Router acts as a 2.4GHz wireless station and connects to the specific Wireless AP. To use Static or Dynamic IP as the accessing protocol of the internet, please select Static or Dynamic IP from the WAN>>Internet Access>>WAN2 page. The following web page will be shown.
the system to execute for WAN detection. If you choose Ping Detect as the detection mode, you have to type required settings for the following items. Primary/Secondary Ping IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you have to type Primary or Secondary IP address in this field for pinging. Ping Gateway IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you also can enable this setting to use current WAN gateway IP address for pinging.
in ASCII or Hexadecimal. Check the key you wish to use. WPA/PSK – The Router connects to the wireless AP as a WPA client and the encryption key should be entered in PSK. WPA/PSK uses TKIP as Encryption Mode. WPA2/PSK uses AES as Encryption Mode. WPA2/PSK – The Router connects to the wireless AP as a WPA2 client and the encryption key should be entered in PSK. Pass Phrase – The PSK. Either 8~63 ASCII characters, such as 012345678..(or 64 Hexadecimal digits leading by 0x, such as "0x321253abcde...").
3G /4G USB Modem (PPP mode) Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable, this function will be closed and all the settings that you adjusted in this page will be invalid. SIM PIN code Type PIN code of the SIM card that will be used to access Internet. The maximum length of the PIN code you can set is 15 characters. Modem Initial String Such value is used to initialize USB modem. Please use the default value. If you have any question, please contact to your ISP.
Mode – Choose PPP Detect or Ping Detect for the system to execute for WAN detection. If you choose Ping Detect as the detection mode, you have to type required settings for the following items. Primary/Secondary Ping IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you have to type Primary or Secondary IP address in this field for pinging. Ping Gateway IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you also can enable this setting to use current WAN gateway IP address for pinging.
Modem Support List It lists all of the modems supported by such router. Enable / Disable Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable, this function will be closed and all the settings that you adjusted in this page will be invalid. SIM PIN code Type PIN code of the SIM card that will be used to access Internet. The maximum length of the PIN code you can set is 19 characters. Network Mode Force Vigor router to connect Internet with the mode specified here.
work. MTU It means Max Transmit Unit for packet. Path MTU Discovery – It is used to detect the maximum MTU size of a packet not to be segmented in specific transmit path. Click Choose IP to open the following dialog. Authentication Path MTU to – Type the IP address as the specific transmit path. MTU size start from – Determine the starting point value of the packet. Default setting is 1500. MTU reduce size by– It determines the decreasing size of MTU value.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable, this function will be closed and all the settings that you adjusted in this page will be invalid. SIM PIN code Type PIN code of the SIM card that will be used to access Internet. The maximum length of the PIN code you can set is 19 characters. Network Mode Force Vigor router to connect Internet with the mode specified here.
please specify an IP address for the system to PING it for keeping alive. Vigor system will send a packet per second to the specified IP address. If the system does not receive any reply from that IP within 10 seconds, Vigor system will reboot LTE module until successfully set LTE connection. PING to the IP – Enter an IP address. Connection Latency Check - Enable the latency time setting for packet reply.
MTU reduce size by – It determines the decreasing size of MTU value. For example, the number specified in this field is “8”. The maximum MTU size is “1500”. After clicking the “detect” button, the system will calculate and get the suitable MTU value such as 1500, 1492, 1484 and etc., automatically. Detect – Click it to detect a suitable MTU value. Accept – After clicking it, the detected value will be displayed in the field of MTU. Authentication Select None or PAP or CHAP.
WAN Connection Detection Such function allows you to verify whether network connection is alive or not through Ping Detect. Mode – Choose Always On or Ping Detect for the system to execute for WAN detection. Always On means no detection will be executed. The network connection will be on always. Ping IP/Hostname – If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you have to type IP address in this field for pinging.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Username Type the name obtained from the broker. It is suggested for you to apply another username and password for http://gogonet.gogo6.com/page/freenet6-account. The maximum length of the name you can set is 63 characters. Password Type the password assigned with the user name. The maximum length of the name you can set is 19 characters. Tunnel Broker Type the address for the tunnel broker IP, FQDN or an optional port number.
II-1-2-15 Details Page for IPv6 – AICCU in WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4 Available settings are explained as follows: 112 Item Description Always On Check this box to keep the network connection always. Username Type the name obtained from the broker. Please apply new account at http://www.sixxs.net/. It is suggested for you to apply another username and password. The maximum length of the name you can set is 19 characters. Password Type the password assigned with the user name.
execute for WAN detection. Ping IP/Hostname – If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you have to type IP address in this field for pinging. TTL (Time to Live) –If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you have to type TTL value. After finished the above settings, click OK to save the settings. II-1-2-16 Details Page for IPv6 – DHCPv6 Client in WAN1/WAN2 DHCPv6 client mode would use DHCPv6 protocol to obtain IPv6 address from server.
Realm – The name (1 to 31 characters) typed here will identify the key which generates HMAC-MD5 value. Secret – Type a text (1 to 31 characters) as s a unique identifier for each client on each DHCP server. WAN Connection Detection Such function allows you to verify whether network connection is alive or not through NS Detect or Ping Detect. Mode – Choose Always On, Ping Detect or NS Detect for the system to execute for WAN detection.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Static IPv6 Address configuration IPv6 Address – Type the IPv6 Static IP Address. Prefix Length – Type the fixed value for prefix length. Add – Click it to add a new entry. Update - Click it to modify an existed entry. Delete – Click it to remove an existed entry. Current IPv6 Address Table Display current interface IPv6 address. Static IPv6 Gateway Configuration IPv6 Gateway Address - Type your IPv6 gateway address here.
Ping IP/Hostname – If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you have to type IP address in this field for pinging. TTL (Time to Live) –If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you have to type TTL value. RIPng Protocol RIPng (RIP next generation) offers the same functions and benefits as IPv4 RIP v2. Bridge Mode Enable Bridge Mode - If the function is enabled, the router will work as a bridge modem. Enable Firewall – It is available when Bridge Mode is enabled.
Address 6in4 IPv6 Address Type the static IPv6 address for IPv4 tunnel with the value for prefix length. LAN Routed Prefix Type the static IPv6 address for LAN routing with the value for prefix length. Tunnel TTL Type the number for the data lifetime in tunnel. WAN Connection Detection Such function allows you to verify whether network connection is alive or not through Ping Detect. Mode – Choose Always On or Ping Detect for the system to execute for WAN detection.
II-1-2-19 Details Page for IPv6 – 6rd in WAN1/WAN2 This type allows you to setup 6rd for WAN interface. Available settings are explained as follows: 118 Item Description 6rd Mode Auto 6rd – Retrieve 6rd prefix automatically from 6rd service provider. The IPv4 WAN must be set as "DHCP". Static 6rd - Set 6rd options manually. IPv4 Border Relay Type the IPv4 addresses of the 6rd Border Relay for a given 6rd domain.
WAN Connection Detection Such function allows you to verify whether network connection is alive or not through Ping Detect. Mode – Choose Always On or Ping Detect for the system to execute for WAN detection. Always On means no detection will be executed. The network connection will be on always. Ping IP/Hostname – If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you have to type IP address in this field for pinging.
II-1-3 Multi-PVC/VLAN Multi-PVC/VLAN lets you configure multiple permanent virtual circuits (PVCs) and ATM QoS for channels using ADSL. Channel 1 to 4 have the following fixed assignments and cannot be altered. Channel 1: ADSL on WAN1. Channel 2: Ethernet on WAN2. Channel 3: USB1 (WAN3). Channels 5 through 10 can be bridged to one or more of the 3 LAN ports P2 through P4. In addition, Channels 5 through 7 can be configured as virtual WANs (WAN5 through WAN7).
WAN links for Channel 5, 6 and 7 are provided for router-borne application such as TR-069. The settings must be applied and obtained from your ISP. For your special request, please contact with your ISP and then click WAN link of Channel 5, 6 or 7 to configure your router. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Channel 5/6/7 Check it to enable this channel. WAN Type Specify a WAN type of the PVC Channel/VLAN.
value. Protocol - (Available when WAN Type is ADSL) Access protocol used for the ADSL connection. Contact your ISP or carrier for the appropriate setting. PPPoA: Point-to-Point over ATM. VC MUX: Virtual Circuit Multiplexing. VLAN Tag – Type the value as the VLAN ID number. Valid settings are in the range from 1 to 4095. The network traffic flowing on each channel will be identified by the system via their VLAN Tags.
Ping Detect - The router sends an ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) echo request every second to the host, whose address is specified in the Ping IP field, to verify the WAN connection. If the remote host does not respond within 30 seconds, the WAN connection is deemed to have failed. Primary/Secondary Ping IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you have to type Primary or Secondary IP address in this field for pinging.
server. Router Name – Sets the value of DHCP Option 12, which is used by some ISPs. Domain Name – Sets the value of DHCP Option 15, which is used by some ISPs. Specify an IP address – Select this option to manually enter the IP address. IP Address – Type in the IP address. Subnet Mask – Type in the subnet mask. Gateway IP Address – Type in gateway IP address. DNS Server IP Address - Type in the primary IP address for the router if you want to use Static IP mode.
Click any index (8~10) to get the following web page: Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Channel 8/9/10 Click it to enable the configuration of this channel. WAN Type The connections and interfaces created in every channel may select a specific WAN type to be built upon. In the Multi-PVC application, only the Ethernet WAN type is available. The user will be able to select the physical WAN interface the channel shall use here.
Encapsulation - (Available when WAN Type is ADSL) Encapsulation mode used for the ASDL connection. Contact your ISP or carrier for the appropriate setting. VC MUX: Virtual Circuit Multiplexing. VLAN Tag – Type the value as the VLAN ID number. Valid settings are in the range from 1 to 4095. The network traffic flowing on each channel will be identified by the system via their VLAN Tags. Channels using the same WAN type may not configure the same VLAN tag value.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Channel The channel number. Channels 3 is reserved for the WAN 3 (USB), and is not configurable. QoS Type Select a proper QoS type for the channel according to the information that your ISP provides. UBR- Unspecified Bit Rate. CBR- Constant Bit Rate. ABR- Available Bit Rate. nrtVBR-Non-real-time Variable Bit Rate. rtVBR- Real-time Variable Bit Rate. PCR It represents Peak Cell Rate. The default setting is “0”.
II-1-4 WAN Budget This function is used to determine the data traffic volume for each WAN interface respectively to prevent from overcharges for data transmission by the ISP. Please note that the Quota Limit and Billing cycle day of month settings will need to be configured correctly first in order for some period calculations to be performed correctly. II-1-4-1 General Setup Or, 128 Item Description Index The WAN port. Click to configure WAN Budget for a particular WAN.
tab was used to set up the usage quota. User Defined: The User Defined option in the Criterion and Action tab was used to set up the usage qota. Duration Start and end timestamps of the current cycle. Click WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or LTE/WAN4 link to open the following web page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Check the box to enable such function. Quota Limit Type the data traffic quota allowed for such WAN interface.
Custom This setting allows the user to define the billing cycle according to his request. The WAN budget will be reset with an interval of billing cycle. Monthly is default setting. If long period or a short period is required, use Custom. The period of cycle duration is between 1 day and 60 days. You can determine the cycle duration by specifying the days and the hours. In addition, you can specify which day of today is in a cycle.
II-1-4-2 Status The status page displays the status WAN budget, including the duration and the usage. If the WAN budget is exhausted, a lock will be displayed on the page if Shutdown WAN interface is selected. Which means no data transmission will be carried out. Moreover, the system will send out a warning message to the administrator if Mail Alert is selected. Or, the system will send out SMS message to the administrator if SMS message is selected.
Application Notes A-1 How to set up Multi-PVC for triple play deployment? By adding VLAN tags to differentiate the traffic, the service provider is able to deliver video, voice, and data to the subscribers over a single connection, which is also known as the triple play service. This document is going to demonstrate how to configure the Multi-PVC feature for triple play deployment.
2. 3. Configure the channel as follows, (a) enable this channel (b) set WAN Type to the WAN interface that the service provider is on. (c) set up VPI and VCI if the WAN is an ADSL line. (d) enable Add VLAN Header and enter the VLAN Tag and Priority as the service provider requires. (e) check Enable for Bridge Mode, and select the physical port member to which you're going to connect the STB. Click OK to save the configuration, the configuration will be displayed on the main page.
Open a Virtual WAN Interface 1. 134 Go to WAN >> Multi-PVC/VLAN, click on channel 5, 6 or 7 to configure.
2. 3. Configure the channel as follows, (a) enable this channel (b) set WAN Type to the WAN interface that the service provider is on. (c) enter the VLAN Tag and Priority as the service provider requires. (d) enable "Open WAN Interface for this Channel", and select the kind of Application will be used on this channel. (Note: this option is only available on channel 5-7) (e) set up the Internet Access type as the ISP requires.
4. 136 Now, you may use the virtual WAN interface for applications such as IGMP Proxy, this can be done by selecting the WAN interface as "PVC/VLAN".
A-2 Load Balancing and Failover for multi-WAN Vigor Routers Network Administrator may set up multiple Internet connection to share the traffic load, or add a redundant Internet connection to the router and gives a higher reliability to the network connection.
Furthermore, Network Administrator would like to specify an outgoing path for some traffic while there are multiple WAN interfaces, Route Policy will be the solution, click here for an instruction of how to designate a WAN interface for LAN clients by Route Policy. Fai l ov er When configured in Failover mode, the WAN interface will only be active when the primary WAN disconnects, and will be down again when the primary WAN resume its service.
A-3 How to configure IPv6 on WAN interface? This document is going to demonstrate how to implement an IPv6 address on Vigor Router's WAN. 1. Before configuring IPv6 on WAN, please make sure the router is connected to the IPv4 Internet. 2. Go to WAN >> Internet Access, click on IPv6 of the WAN interface that you would like to configure an IPv6 address. 3. Select a Connection Type from the drop-down list, enter the required parameters. Then click OK and reboot the router to apply the settings.
4. After accomplishing the configurations, Network Administrator may check the status from the IPv6 tab on Online Status >> Physical Connection page. 5. Furthermore, Network Administrator may test the connectivity of IPv6 from the router by going to Diagnostics >> Ping Diagnosis and selecting "IPv6". Below we will provide some examples of configuring IPv6 with different connection types.
PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) This applies if the IPv4 access mode is PPPoE, and the IPv4 ISP also provides an IPv6 address. To use IPv6 PPP, you just need to choose the Connection Type to "PPP", no other setting is required. TSPC (Tunnel Setup Protocol Client) In this mode, the IPv6 connectivity is provided by a tunnel broker on the IPv4 Internet through a tunnel set up by Tunnel Setup Protocol (TSP).
Static IPv6 If your ISP provides a static IPv6 address for you, you may configure that IPv6 address for WAN by doing the following steps: 142 1. Set Connection Type to Static IPv6. 2. Enter the IPv6 address and Prefix Length which provided by the ISP, and click Add. 3. You should see the IPv6 address in Current IPv6 Address Table. Then, specify the IP address of IPv6 Gateway.
6in4 Static Tunnel In this mode, the IPv6 connectivity is provided by a tunnel broker on the IPv4 Internet through a tunnel configured manually. To use 6in4 Static Tunnel, you need sign up for a tunnel broker service and get an IPv6 address and routed IPv6 prefixes first. Then, configure the router as follows: 1. Set Connection Type to 6in4 Static Tunnel. 2. Enter the tunnel server's IPv4 address in Remote Endpoint IPv4 Address. 3. Enter the router's IPv6 address in 6in4 IPv6 Address. 4.
II-2 LAN Local Area Network (LAN) is a group of subnets regulated and ruled by router. The design of network structure is related to what type of public IP addresses coming from your ISP. The most generic function of Vigor router is NAT. It creates a private subnet of your own. As mentioned previously, the router will talk to other public hosts on the Internet by using public IP address and talking to local hosts by using its private IP address.
What is Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Vigor router will exchange routing information with neighboring routers using the RIP to accomplish IP routing. This allows users to change the information of the router such as IP address and the routers will automatically inform for each other. What is Static Route When you have several subnets in your LAN, sometimes a more effective and quicker way for connection is the Static routes function rather than other method.
Web User Interface A LAN comprises a collection of LAN clients, which are networked devices on your premises. A LAN client can be a computer, a printer, a Voice-over-IP (VoIP) phone, a mobile phone, a gaming console, an Internet Protocol Television (IPTV), etc, and can have either a wired (using Ethernet cabling) or wireless (using Wi-Fi) network connection.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description General Setup Allow to configure settings for each subnet respectively. Index - Display all of the LAN items. Status- Basically, LAN1 status is enabled in default. LAN2 –LAN6 and IP Routed Subnet can be observed by checking the box of Status. DHCP/DHCPv6- LAN1 is configured with DHCP/DHCPv6 in default. If required, please check the DHCP box for each LAN. IP Address - Display the IP address for each LAN item.
For detailed information, refer to later section. Force router to use “DNS server IP address …..” Force Vigor router to use DNS servers configured in LAN1/LAN2/LAN3/LAN4/LAN5/LAN6/LAN7/LAN8/DMZ Port instead of DNS servers given by the Internet Access server (PPPoE, PPTP, L2TP or DHCP server). Inter-LAN Routing Check the box to link two or more different subnets (LAN and LAN). Inter-LAN Routing allows different LAN subnets to be interconnected or isolated.
Subnet Mask - The subnet mask, together with the IP Address field, indicates the maximum number of clients allowed on the subnet. (Default: 255.255.255.0/ 24). LAN IP Alias –Such feature allows specifying multiple gateways (under a switch) with different WAN interfaces for accessing the Internet via the Vigor router. RIP Protocol Control, Enable – When Enabled, the router will attempt to exchange routing information with neighbouring routers using the Routing Information Protocol.
Network Configuration section above. Lease Time - The maximum duration DHCP-issued IP addresses can be used before they have to be renewed. Clear DHCP lease for inactive clients periodically - If selected, the router sends ARP requests recycles IP addresses previously assigned to inactive DHCP clients to prevent exhaustion of the IP address pool.
Alternatively, static IP addresses can be manually configured on LAN clients as part of their network settings. No matter how IP addresses are configured, it is important that no two devices get the same IP address. If both DHCP and static assignment are used on a network, it is important to exclude the static IP addresses from the DHCP IP pool. For example, if your LAN uses the 192.168.1.x subnet and you have 20 DHCP clients and 20 static IP clients, you could configure 192.168.1.
II-2-1-2 Details Page for LAN2 ~ LAN8 and DMZ Available settings are explained as follows: 152 Item Description Network Configuration Enable/Disable - Click Enable to enable such configuration; click Disable to disable such configuration. For NAT Usage - Click this radio button to invoke NAT function. For Routing Usage - Click this radio button to invoke this function. IP Address - This is the IP address of the router. (Default: 192.168.1.1).
Network Configuration section above. Lease Time - The maximum duration DHCP-issued IP addresses can be used before they have to be renewed. Clear DHCP lease for inactive clients periodically - If selected, the router sends ARP requests recycles IP addresses previously assigned to inactive DHCP clients to prevent exhaustion of the IP address pool.
II-2-1-3 Details Page for IP Routed Subnet Available settings are explained as follows: 154 Item Description Network Configuration Enable/Disable - Click Enable to enable such configuration; click Disable to disable such configuration. For Routing Usage, IP Address - This is the IP address of the router. (Default: 192.168.1.1). Subnet Mask - The subnet mask, together with the IP Address field, indicates the maximum number of clients allowed on the subnet. (Default: 255.255.255.0/ 24).
Use LAN Port – Specify an IP for IP Route Subnet. If it is enabled, DHCP server will assign IP address automatically for the clients coming from P1 and/or P2. Please check the box of P1 and P2. Use MAC Address - Check such box to specify MAC address. MAC Address: Enter the MAC Address of the host one by one and click Add to create a list of hosts which can be assigned, deleted or edited from above pool.
II-2-1-4 Details Page for LAN IPv6 Setup There are two configuration pages for LAN1/LAN2/LAN3/LAN4/LAN5/LAN6/LAN7/LAN8/DMZ Port, Ethernet TCP/IP and DHCP Setup (based on IPv4) and IPv6 Setup. Click the tab for each type and refer to the following explanations for detailed information. Below shows the settings page for IPv6. It provides 2 daemons for LAN side IPv6 address configuration. One is SLAAC(stateless) and the other is DHCPv6 (Stateful) server.
configuration Prefix Length – Type the fixed value for prefix length. Add – Click it to add a new entry. Delete – Click it to remove an existed entry. Unique Local Address (ULA) configuration Unique Local Addresses (ULAs) are private IPv6 addresses assigned to LAN clients. Off - ULA is disabled. Manually ULA Prefix - LAN clients will be assigned ULAs generated based on the prefix manually entered. Auto ULA Prefix - LAN clients will be assigned ULAs using an automatically-determined prefix.
end address for IPv6 server. Advance setting – Click the Edit button to configure advanced IPv6 settings for DHCPv6 server. Advance setting The Advanced Settings page has additional settings for Router Advertisement and enabling multiple WANs for IPv6 traffic. Router Advertisement Configuration – Click Enable to enable router advertisement server.
selected, the router will determine the MTU value for LAN. RIPng Protocol –RIPng (RIP next generation) offers the same functions and benefits as IPv4 RIP v2. Extension WAN – In addition to the default WAN used for IPv6 traffic specified in the WAN Primary Interface in the LAN IPv6 Setup page, additional WANs can be selected to carry IPv6 traffic by enabling them in the Extension WAN section. Available WAN – Additional WANs available but not currently selected to carry IPv6 traffic.
Next Server IP Address/SIAddr Overrides the DHCP Next Server IP address (DHCP Option 66) supplied by the DHCP server. Option Number DHCP option number (e.g., 100). DataType Type of data in the Data field: ASCII Character - A text string. Example: /path. Hexadecimal Digit - A hexadecimal string. Valid characters are from 0 to 9 and from a to f. Example: 2f70617468. Address List - One or more IPv4 addresses, delimited by commas. Data Data of this DHCP option.
II-2-2 VLAN Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) allow you to subdivide your LAN to facilitate management or to improve network security. Select LAN>>VLAN from the menu bar of the Web UI to bring up the VLAN Configuration page. Tagged VLAN The tagged VLANs (802.1q) can mark data with a VLAN identifier. This identifier can be carried through an onward Ethernet switch to specific ports. The specific VLAN clients can also pick up this identifier as it is just passed to the LAN.
Info Settings in this page only applied to LAN port but not WAN port. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Click it to enable VLAN configuration. LAN P1 – P4 – Check the LAN port(s) to group them under the selected VLAN. Wireless LAN (2.4GHz) SSID1 – SSID4 – Check the SSID boxes to group them under the selected VLAN. Wireless LAN (5GHz) SSID1 – SSID4 – Check the SSID boxes to group them under the selected VLAN.
Inter-LAN Routing The Vigor router supports up to 15 VLANs. Each VLAN can be set up to use one or more of the Ethernet ports and wireless LAN Service Set Identifiers (SSIDs).
164 4. Click OK. 5. Open LAN>>General Setup. If you want to let the clients in both groups communicate with each other, simply activate Inter-LAN Routing by checking the box between LAN1 and LAN2.
Vigor router supports up to six private IP subnets on LAN. Each can be independent (isolated) or common (able to communicate with each other). This is ideal for departmental or multi-occupancy applications. Info Vigor2862 Series User’s Guide As for the VLAN applications, refer to “Appendix I: VLAN Application on Vigor Router” for more detailed information.
II-2-3 Bind IP to MAC This function is used to bind the IP and MAC address in LAN to have a strengthening control in network. With the Bind IP to MAC feature you can reserve LAN IP addresses for LAN clients. Each reserved IP address is associated with a Media Access Control (MAC) address. Click LAN and click Bind IP to MAC to open the setup page. Available settings are explained as follows: 166 Item Description Enable Click this radio button to invoke this function.
MAC-to-IP address associations on this page. LAN client whose MAC address has not been bound to an IP address will be denied network access. Note: Before selecting Strict Bind, make sure at least one valid MAC address has been bound to an IP address. Otherwise no LAN clients will have network access, and it will not be possible to connect to the router to make changes to its configuration. Apply Strict Bind to Subnet – Choose the subnet(s) for applying the rules of Bind IP to MAC.
Restore to restore the backup and overwrite the existing list. Info Before you select Strict Bind, you have to bind one set of IP/MAC address for one PC. If not, no one of the PCs can access into Internet. And the web user interface of the router might not be accessed. When you finish the configuration, click OK to save the settings.
II-2-4 LAN Port Mirror The LAN Port Mirror function allows network traffic of select LAN ports to be forwarded to another LAN port for analysis. This is useful for enforcing policies, detecting unauthorized access, monitoring network performance, etc. Select LAN>>LAN Port Mirror from the menu bar of the Web UI to bring up the LAN Port Mirror configuration page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Port Mirror Enables or disables LAN Port Mirroring.
II-2-5 Wired 802.1x Wired 802.1X provides authentication for clients wishing to connect to the LAN by Ethernet. Only one client can be authenticated on each LAN port. Select LAN>>Wired 802.1X from the menu bar of the Web UI to bring up the Wired 802.1X configuration page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Check the box to enable LAN 802.1x function. Authentication Type External RADIUS - An external RADIUS server is to be used for 802.1X authentication.
II-3 Hardware Acceleration Hardware Acceleration is also called PPA in DrayTek for it is based on Protocol Processing Engine (PPE) of Infineon. It can only support 128 sessions for network traffic (IN & OUT) with implementing three kinds of modes - Disable, Auto and Manual. Info Such feature is only supported by certain firmware version.
the Auto mode does not support UDP protocol by designed. Manual - The Manual mode implements three sub-items-Accelerate most heavy traffic sessions, Apply the Class Rule in Quality of Service, and Specific Hosts. Each of these sub-items can support TCP and UDP protocol. Protocol There are two types supported by this function, TCP and UDP. Option Accelerate heaviest traffic sessions – Such option is available in Auto Mode, too. But the UDP protocol is only supported in this sub-item.
Vigor2862 Series User’s Guide 173
II-4 NAT Usually, the router serves as an NAT (Network Address Translation) router. NAT is a mechanism that one or more private IP addresses can be mapped into a single public one. Public IP address is usually assigned by your ISP, for which you may get charged. Private IP addresses are recognized only among internal hosts.
Web User Interface II-4-1 Port Redirection Port Redirection is usually set up for server related service inside the local network (LAN), such as web servers, FTP servers, E-mail servers etc. Most of the case, you need a public IP address for each server and this public IP address/domain name are recognized by all users.
Each item is explained as follows: Item Description Index Display the number of the profile. Enable Check the box to enable the port redirection profile. Service Name Display the description of the specific network service. WAN Interface Display the WAN IP address used by the profile. Protocol Display the transport layer protocol (TCP or UDP). Public Port Display the port number which will be redirected to the specified Private IP and Port of the internal host.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Check this box to enable such port redirection setting. Mode Two options (Single and Range) are provided here for you to choose. To set a range for the specific service, select Range. In Range mode, if the public port (start port and end port) and the starting IP of private IP had been entered, the system will calculate and display the ending IP of private IP automatically.
Note that the router has its own built-in services (servers) such as Telnet, HTTP and FTP etc. Since the common port numbers of these services (servers) are all the same, you may need to reset the router in order to avoid confliction. For example, the built-in web user interface in the router is with default port 80, which may conflict with the web server in the local network, http://192.168.1.13:80.
II-4-2 DMZ Host As mentioned above, Port Redirection can redirect incoming TCP/UDP or other traffic on particular ports to the specific private IP address/port of host in the LAN. However, other IP protocols, for example Protocols 50 (ESP) and 51 (AH), do not travel on a fixed port. Vigor router provides a facility DMZ Host that maps ALL unsolicited data on any protocol to a single host in the LAN.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description WAN 1 Choose Private IP or None first. Private IP Enter the private IP address of the DMZ host, or click Choose PC to select one. Choose IP Click this button and then a window will automatically pop up, as depicted below. The window consists of a list of private IP addresses of all hosts in your LAN network. Select one private IP address in the list to be the DMZ host.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Check to enable the DMZ Host function. Private IP Enter the private IP address of the DMZ host, or click Choose PC to select one. Choose IP Click this button and then a window will automatically pop up, as depicted below. The window consists of a list of private IP addresses of all hosts in your LAN network. Select one private IP address in the list to be the DMZ host.
II-4-3 Open Ports Open Ports allows you to open a range of ports for the traffic of special applications. Common application of Open Ports includes P2P application (e.g., BT, KaZaA, Gnutella, WinMX, eMule and others), Internet Camera etc. Ensure that you keep the application involved up-to-date to avoid falling victim to any security exploits.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Open Ports Check to enable this entry. Comment Make a name for the defined network application/service. WAN Interface Specify the WAN interface that will be used for this entry. Source IP Use the drop down list to specify an IP object. Or click IP Object link to create a new one for applying. WAN IP Specify the WAN IP address that will be used for this entry. This setting is available when WAN IP Alias is configured.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration. II-4-4 Port Triggering Port Triggering is a variation of open ports function. The key difference between "open port" and "port triggering" is: Once the OK button is clicked and the configuration has taken effect, "open port" keeps the ports opened forever. Once the OK button is clicked and the configuration has taken effect, "port triggering" will only attempt to open the ports once the triggering conditions are met.
Item Description Index Indicate the relative number for the port triggering profile. You should click the appropriate index number to edit or clear the corresponding entry. Enable Check the box to enable the Port Triggering profile. Comment Display the text which memorizes the application of this rule. Triggering Protocol Display the protocol of the triggering packets. Source IP Display the name of the IP object. Triggering Port Display the port of the triggering packets.
Comment Type the text to memorize the application of this rule. Source IP Use the drop down list to specify an IP object. Or click IP Object link to create a new one for applying. Triggering Protocol Select the protocol (TCP, UDP or TCP/UDP) for such triggering profile. Triggering Port Type the port or port range for such triggering profile. Incoming Protocol When the triggering packets received, it is expected the incoming packets will use the selected protocol.
II-5 Applications Dynamic DNS The ISP often provides you with a dynamic IP address when you connect to the Internet via your ISP. It means that the public IP address assigned to your router changes each time you access the Internet. The Dynamic DNS feature lets you assign a domain name to a dynamic WAN IP address. It allows the router to update its online WAN IP address mappings on the specified Dynamic DNS server.
UPnP The UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) protocol is supported to bring to network connected devices the ease of installation and configuration which is already available for directly connected PC peripherals with the existing Windows 'Plug and Play' system. For NAT routers, the major feature of UPnP on the router is “NAT Traversal”. This enables applications inside the firewall to automatically open the ports that they need to pass through a router.
Web User Interface II-5-1 Dynamic DNS Enable the Function and Add a Dynamic DNS Account 1. Assume you have a registered domain name from the DDNS provider, say hostname.dyndns.org, and an account with username: test and password: test. 2. Open Applications>>Dynamic DNS. 3. In the DDNS setup menu, check Enable Dynamic DNS Setup. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Dynamic DNS Setup Check this box to enable DDNS function.
4. Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles and recover to factory settings. View Log Display DDNS log status. Force Update Force the router updates its information to DDNS server. Auto-Update interval Set the time for the router to perform auto update for DDNS service. Index Click the number below Index to access into the setting page of DDNS setup to set account(s). Enable Check the box to enable such account. WAN Interface Display the WAN interface used.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Dynamic DNS Account Check this box to enable the current account. If you did check the box, you will see a check mark appeared on the Active column of the previous web page in step 2). WAN Interface WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or LTE/WAN4 First - While connecting, the router will use WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or LTE /WAN4 as the first channel for such account. If WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or LTE /WAN4 fails, the router will use another WAN interface instead.
selected as Service Provider. (e.g: /dynamic/dns/update.asp?u=jo***&p=jo********&hostname=j* ***.changeip.org&ip=###IP### &cmd=update&offline=0) 5. Auth Type Two types can be used for authentication. Basic – Username and password defined later can be shown from the packets captured. URL - Username and password defined later can be shown in URL. (e.g., http://ns1.vigorddns.com/ddns.php?username=xxxx& password=xxxx&domain=xxxx.vigorddns.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Dynamic DNS Account Check this box to enable the current account. If you did check the box, you will see a check mark appeared on the Active column of the previous web page in step 2). Service Provider Choose DrayTek Global as the service provider. Wizard – This button is available when DrayTek Global is selected as Service Provider.
Delete a Dynamic DNS Account Click the Index number you want to delete and then click Clear All button to delete the account.
II-5-2 LAN DNS / DNS Forwarding LAN DNS lets the network administrators host servers with privacy and security. When the network administrators of your office set up FTP, Mail or Web server inside LAN, you can specify specific private IP address (es) to correspondent servers. Thus, even the remote PC is adopting public DNS as the DNS server, the LAN DNS resolution on Vigor2862 series will respond the specified private IP address. Simply click Application>>LAN DNS /DNS Forwarding to open the following page.
Index Click the number below Index to access into the setting page. Profile Display the name of the LAN DNS profile. Domain Name Display the domain name of the LAN DNS profile. Forwarding Display that such profile is conditional DNS forwarding or not. DNS Server Display the IP addres of the DNS Server. To create a LAN DNS profile: 1. Click any index, say Index No. 1. 2. The detailed settings with index 1 are shown below.
Only responds to the DNS…. – Different LAN PCs can share the same domain name. However, you have to check this box to make the router identify & respond the IP address for the DNS query coming from different LAN PC. Delete – Click it to remove an existed IP address on the list. 3. Click OK button to save the settings. 4. If you need to configure LAN DNS settings, click index 1 to edit the LAN DNS profile just created. Or, you can click index 2 to use this profile as conditional DNS forwarding.
II-5-3 DNS Security DNS security is able to ensure that the incoming data is not falsified and the source of the data is secure and correct to prevent from DNS attack by someone. II-5-3-1 General Setup All of WAN interfaces of Vigor router can be configured with DNS Security enabled respectively. Available settings are explained as follows: 198 Item Description Interface There are four WAN interfaces allowed to be set with DNS security enabled.
II-5-3-2 Domain Diagnose This page is used to configure settings for manually detecting if the domain is secure not. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Domain Type the domain name or IP address (IPv4/IPv6) that you want to query. Interface Specify the interface required for executing diagnose. DNS Server Type the IP address of the DNS Server which will diagnose the domain specified above. Diagnose Click it to perform the diagnosis for the domain.
II-5-4 Schedule The Vigor router has a built-in clock which can update itself manually or automatically by means of Network Time Protocols (NTP). As a result, you can not only schedule the router to dialup to the Internet at a specified time, but also restrict Internet access to certain hours so that users can connect to the Internet only during certain hours, say, business hours. The schedule is also applicable to other functions. You have to set your time before set schedule.
Index Click the index number link to access into the setting page of schedule. Comment Display the name of the time schedule. Time Display the valid time period by time bar. Frequency Display which day(s) will be always on and which day(s) will be always off of the schedule profile by color boxes. - If it lights in green, it means such schedule is active. You can set up to 15 schedules. Then you can apply them to your Internet Access or VPN and Remote Access >> LAN-to-LAN settings.
3. Action Specify which action Call Schedule should apply during the period of the schedule. Force On -Force the connection to be always on. Force Down -Force the connection to be always down. How Often Specify how often the schedule will be applied. Once -The schedule will be applied just once Monthly, on date – The router will only execute the action applied such schedule on the date (1 to 28) of a month. Cycle duration – Type a number as cycle duration.
II-5-5 RADIUS/TACACS+ Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) is a security authentication client/server protocol that supports authentication, authorization and accounting, which is widely used by Internet service providers. It is the most common method of authenticating and authorizing dial-up and tunneled network users.
is 36 characters. Confirm Shared Secret - Re-type the Shared Secret for confirmation. Enable Accounting After checking it, Vigor router supports the accounting feature (available seconds for using, quantity of RX/TX data) for external RADIUS server. Any client tries to access the Internet shall be authenticated and accounted by an external RADIUS server. Accounting Port –The UDP port number that the RADIUS server is using. The default value is 1813, based on RFC 2138.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Check to enable internal RADIUS client feature. Authentication Port Set a port number for internal RADIUS server. RADIUS Client Access List Allow to configure that clients under specified domain (IPv4 and IPv6) must be authenticated with the specified shared secret. Enable - Check to enable RADIUS client feature.
Shared Secret - The RADIUS server and client share a secret that is used to authenticate the messages sent between them. Both sides must be configured to use the same shared secret. The maximum length of the shared secret you can set is 36 characters. IP Address – Type the IP addres of the wired/wireless client. IP Mask – Type the subnet mask required for the IP address. IPv6 Address – Type the IPv6 address of the wired/wireless client. IPv6 Length - Type the prefix length required for the IPv6 address.
II-5-5-3 External TACACS+ It means Terminal Access Controller Access-Control System Plus. It works like RADIUS does. Click the External TACACS+ to open the following page: Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Check to enable TACACS+ feature. Server IP Address Enter the IP address of TACACS+ server. Destination Port The UDP port number that the TACACS+ server is using.
II-5-6 Active Directory/LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a communication protocol for using in TCP/IP network. It defines the methods to access distributing directory server by clients, work on directory and share the information in the directory by clients. The LDAP standard is established by the work team of Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).
After finished the above settings, click OK button to save the settings. II-5-6-2 Active Directory / LDAP Profiles You can configure eight AD/LDAP profiles. These profiles would be used with User Management for different purposes in management. Click any index number link to open the following page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Name Type a name for such profile. The length of the user name is limited to 19 characters.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save and exit this page. A new profile has been created.
II-5-7 UPnP The UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) protocol is supported to bring to network connected devices the ease of installation and configuration which is already available for directly connected PC peripherals with the existing Windows 'Plug and Play' system. For NAT routers, the major feature of UPnP on the router is “NAT Traversal”. This enables applications inside the firewall to automatically open the ports that they need to pass through a router.
II-5-8 IGMP IGMP is the abbreviation of Internet Group Management Protocol. It is a communication protocol which is mainly used for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups. II-5-8-1 General Setting Available settings are explained as follows: 212 Item Description IGMP Proxy Check this box to enable this function. The application of multicast will be executed through WAN /PVC/VLAN port. In addition, such function is available in NAT mode.
IGMP Fast Leave Check this box to make the router stop forwarding multicast traffic to a LAN port as soon as it receives a leave message from that port. Each LAN port should have one IGMP host connected. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration. II-5-8-2 Working Group Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Refresh Click this link to renew the working multicast group status.
II-5-9 Wake on LAN A PC client on LAN can be woken up by the router it connects. When a user wants to wake up a specified PC through the router, he/she must type correct MAC address of the specified PC on this web page of Wake on LAN (WOL) of this router. In addition, such PC must have installed a network card supporting WOL function. By the way, WOL function must be set as “Enable” on the BIOS setting.
II-5-10 SMS / Mail Alert Service The function of SMS (Short Message Service)/Mail Alert is that Vigor router sends a message to user’s mobile or e-mail box through specified service provider to assist the user knowing the real-time abnormal situations. Vigor router allows you to set up to 10 SMS profiles which will be sent out according to different conditions. II-5-10-1 SMS Alert This page allows you to specify SMS provider, who will get the SMS, what the content is and when the SMS will be sent.
II-5-10-2 Mail Alert This page allows you to specify Mail Server profile, who will get the notification e-mail, what the content is and when the message will be sent. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Index Check the box to enable such profile. Mail Service Use the drop down list to choose mail service object. All of the available objects are created in Object Settings>>SMS/Mail Service Object.
II-5-11 Bonjour Bonjour is a service discovery protocol which is a built-in service in Mac OS X; for Windows or Linux platform, there is correspondent software to enable this function for free. Usually, users have to configure the router or personal computers to use above services. Sometimes, the configuration (e.g., IP settings, port number) is complicated and not easy to complete. The purpose of Bonjour is to decrease the settings configuration (e.g., IP setting).
2. Open the web browse, Firefox. If Bonjour and DNSSD have been installed, you can open the web page (DNSSD) and see the following results. 3. Open System Maintenance>>Management. Type a name as the Router Name and click OK. 4. Next, open Applications>>Bonjour. Check the service that you want to use via Bonjour. 5. Open the DNSSD page again. The available items will be changed as the follows.
6. Now, any page or document can be printed out through Vigor router (installed with a printer).
II-5-12 High Availability The High Availability (HA) feature of the router provides redundancy of network resources, and reduces downtime in case of component failure. The level of sophistication of HA is determined by availability requirements and tolerance of system interruptions. Systems that provide near full-time availability typically have redundant hardware and software. The HA of the Vigor2862 Series is designed to avoid single points-of-failure.
II-5-12-1 General Setup Open Applications>>High Availability to bring up the configuration page to configure High Availability. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable High Abailablity Check this box to enable HA function. Redundancy Method Select the redundancy method for high availability. Hot-Standby Such method is suitable when there is only one ISP account. When this method is selected, During normal operation the secondary router will be idling.
router any more. Active-Standby This method is suitable when there are multiple simultaneously active ISP connections. When this method is selected, All WANs on the secondary routers can be up at the same time. LANs that are not configured under high availability can be routed to secondary routers. WAN settings of primary and secondary routers are independently configured. Config Sync may be enabled to synchronize most configuration settings between the primary and secondary routers.
II-5-12-2 Config Sync This page is used to specify the synchronization time for such Vigor router. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Config Sync (Max. Sync to 10 routers) Check this box to enable configuration synchronization. To sync configuration from primary to secondary router, both primary and seconday routers need to enable “config sync”. Note that config sync can be enabled by Hot-Standby redundancy method only.
Example: In the following example, the first Vigor2862 is configured as the primary device, and the other Vigor2862 is the secondary device. When the primary Vigor2862 breaks down, the secondary device assumes the role of the primary device by taking over all responsibilities as soon as possible. However, when the primary device recovers, the secondary device will once again be the standby device.
II-5-13 Local 802.1X General Setup Such page allows you to configure general settings for Local 802.1X server built in Vigor router. The local 802.X server can be used to authenticate wired and wireless LAN clients. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Click it to enable the built-in 802.1X server. At present, such feature can be used for wireless and wired 802.1x authentication. User Profile Select All – Click to add all User Profiles to the 802.1X server.
If Local 802.1X is configured as Disabled (unchecked), the Internal RADIUS will be changed as Disabled too, even if it is enabled previously. OK Click it to save the settings. Clear Click it to remove previous setting configuration. Cancel Click it to give up all settings configuration. When you finish the configuration, please click OK to save and exit this page.
Application Notes A-1 How to use High Availability? High Availability provides hardware redundancy to the LAN clients. DrayTek Router has two modes for High Availability feature: Hot-Standby and Active-Standby. In Hot-Standby Mode, Primary and Secondary router share the same WAN source. Usually, only the Primary is online. When Primary goes down, Secondary comes up and use the same WAN line to dial up, and continue to provide Internet service to LAN clients.
(for management Interface) will be considered, e.g., 192.168.1.2 has higher priority than 192.168.1.3…, etc. (c) Authentication Key: enter the same authentication key on all the members. (d) Management Interface: the packets for communication (including deciding the primary, configuration sync, and some maintenance…,etc) between members will be sent in the management interface, in other word, clients in other LAN subnet won't be able to see these packets.
4. Configuring LAN on the primary router. (a) Set up the LAN IP address, it has to be different from the Virtual IP and the LAN IP of secondary router. Again, for any routers with the same Priority ID, their IP addresses will be compared, so we suggest to use a IP with lower number on the Primary one. (b) Gateway IP is the same with LAN IP, and the note in parentheses indicates that the gateway IP provided to LAN clients will be replaced by the Virtual IP.
5. Info 6. 230 Configure LAN on the secondary router. Mind that the IP should be different and larger than it on the primary router. If you have more than one LAN, you should set all the LAN IP of each LAN on Primary and Secondary routers to different IP addresses to avoid IP conflict.
Then confirm the WAN setup by seeing WAN online. 7. After all the functions are set properly on the primary router, we link up the management interface LAN so both routers can start detecting each other, deciding which one should be the primary and syncing the configuration. Since the routers will communicate via the Management Interface, it's required to use the ports that belong to the Management Interface LAN (LAN1 in this scenario). We can check for this information in LAN >> VLAN.
Note: The "Cached Time" indicates the time that router has got the information from the other router ago. Click "Renew" to update the information of remote router, click "Refresh" to update the information of local router. When a sync is finished or the routers are already having the same configuration, it will show the "Equal" result: Note that the router will check if there's any un-synced modification when it reaches the time interval we set in step 2. We may force to sync by clicking the "Sync" button.
10. We may also check the Details page. Sharing the WCF License 11. Now the routers are set, if you have WCF license, you may create a group on MyVigor so these routers can share the same license. (a) First, login to myvigor.draytek.
(b) Give a Group Name, select an HA unused Group ID, and select the member routers in the HA Device drop-down menu: Note that the drop-down menu only lists out the devices that are registered under this MyVigor account. If you don't find the router you are using, please find out which account this device is registered under.
A-2 How to use DrayDDNS? Vigor router supports various DDNS service providers, user can set up user-defined profile to update the DDNS even the service provider is not on the list. Now, DrayTek starts to support our own DDNS service - DrayDDNS. We will provide a domain name for each Vigor Router, this single domain name can record IP addresses of all WAN. Activate DrayDDNS License 1.
Configure DDNS Profile 1. Go to Applications >> Dynamic DNS Setup, a. Tick Enable Dynamic DNS Setup b. Click an available profile index c. Tick Enable Dynamic DNS Account d. Select DrayTek Global (www.drayddns.com) as Service Provider e. Select the WAN you would like to upload the IP to DDNS server f. Click Get domain g.
2. Wait few seconds for router to get the domain name, then, we can click the profile to check the information of license and domain name. Modify Domain Name Currently, only the domain name is allowed to be modified MyVigor website. We will need to register the router to MyVigor server, and log in to MyVigor website to modify it. 1. 2. Please visit https://myvigor.draytek.com/ or go to Applications >> Dynamic DNS Setup >> DrayDDNS profile and click Edit domain.
3. Input the desired Domain name (e.g., XXXX25) and click Update. 4. Vigor router will get the modified domain name when the it performs next DDNS updating. We can click Sync domain to accelerate this process. After few seconds, the router will get the new domain name and print it on the profiles list.
Vigor2862 Series User’s Guide 239
A-3 How to Implement the LDAP/AD Authentication for User Management? For simplifying the configuration of LDAP authentication for User Access Management, we implement “Group” feature. There is no need to pre-configure user profile for each user on Vigor router anymore. We only need to configure the Groups DN, then the Vigor router (e.g., Vigor 2860 series) can pass the authentication to LDAP server with the pre-defined Group path. Below shows the configuration steps: 1.
and 4. Click OK to save the settings above. 5. Open User Management>>General Setup. Select User-Based as the Mode option.
6. Then open VPN and Remote Access>>PPP General Setup to check the profile(s) that will be authenticated with LDAP server. After above configurations, users belong to either “rd1” or “shrd” group can access Internet after inputting their credentials on LDAP server.
A-4 How to Configure Customized DDNS? This article describes how to configure customized DDNS on Vigor routers to update your IP to the DDNS server. We will take “Changeip.org” and “3322.net” as example. Before setting, please make sure that the WAN connection is up. Part A : Changeip.org Note that, Username: jo*** Password: jo******** Host name: j*****.changeip.org WAN IP address: 1.169.185.242 Following is the screenshot of editing the HTML script on the browser to update your IP to the DDNS server.
Now we have to configure the router so it can do the same job for us automatically. 3. Please go to Applications >> Dynamic DNS to create a profile for customized DDNS client. 2. Set the Service Provider as User-Defined. 3. Set the Service API as: /dynamic/dns/update.asp?u=jo***&p=jo********&hostname=j****.changeip.org&ip=###IP ### &cmd=update&offline=0 In which, ###IP### is a value which will be replaced with the current interface IP address automatically when DDNS service is running.
WAN IP address: 111.243.178.53 To update the IP to the DDNS server via editing the HTML script, we can type the following script on the browser: “good 111.243.178.53” means our IP has been updated to the server successfully. Now we have to configure the router so it can do the same job for us automatically. 1. Please go to Applications >> Dynamic DNS to create a profile for Customized DDNS client. 4. Set the Service Provider as User-Defined. 5. Set the Provider Host as member.3322.net. 6.
Part C : Extend Note The customized Service Provider is also eligible with the ClouDNS.net.
II-6 Routing Route Policy (also well known as PBR, policy-based routing) is a feature where you may need to get a strategy for routing. The packets will be directed to the specified interface if they match one of the policies. You can setup route policies in various reasons such as load balance, security, routing decision, and etc. Through protocol, IP address, port number and interface configuration, Route Policy can be used to configure any routing rules to fit actual request.
Web User Interface II-6-1 Static Route Go to Routing >> Static Route. The router offers IPv4 and IPv6 for you to configure the static route. Both protocols bring different web pages. Static Route for IPv4 Available settings are explained as follows: 248 Item Description Index The number (1 to 30) under Index allows you to open next page to set up static route. Enable Check the box to enable the static route profile. Destination Address Displays the destination address of the static route.
Add Static Routes to Private and Public Networks Here is an example (based on IPv4) of setting Static Route in Main Router so that user A and B locating in different subnet can talk to each other via the router. Assuming the Internet access has been configured and the router works properly: use the Main Router to surf the Internet. create a private subnet 192.168.10.0 using an internal Router A (192.168.1.2) create a public subnet 211.100.88.0 via an internal Router B (192.168.1.3).
2. Click the LAN >> Static Route and click on the Index Number 1. Check the Enable box. Please add a static route as shown below, which regulates all packets destined to 192.168.10.0 will be forwarded to 192.168.1.2. Click OK. Available settings are explained as follows: 250 Item Description Enable Click it to enable this profile. Destination IP Address Type an IP address as the destination of such static route. Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask for such static route.
Static Route for IPv6 You can set up to 40 profiles for IPv6 static route. Click the IPv6 tab to open the following page: Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Index The number (1 to 40) under Index allows you to open next page to set up static route. Enable Check the box to enable the static route profile. Destination Address Displays the destination address of the static route. Set to Factory Default Clear all of the settings and return to factory default settings.
Network Interface Use the drop down list to specify an interface for this static route. When you finish the configuration, please click OK to save and exit this page.
II-6-2 Load-Balance /Route Policy It allows network administrator to manage the outbound traffic more specifically. The policy set in Load-Balance/Route Policy always has higher priority than Default Route and Auto Load Balance set in WAN >> Internet Access, and always has lower priority than the Firewall Rules. Administrator may also define a priority to this policy.
Advance Mode Allow to configure detailed settings of route policy. To use Wizard Mode, simple do the following steps: 1. Click the Wizard Mode radio button. 2. Click Index 1. The setting page will appear as follows: Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Source IP Any – Any IP can be treated as the source IP. Src IP Start - Type the source IP start for the specified WAN interface. Src IP End - Type the source IP end for the specified WAN interface.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Interface Use the drop down list to choose a WAN or LAN interface or VPN profile. Packets match with the above criteria will be transferred to the interface chosen here. 4. Specify an interface and click Next. The following page will appear only if you choose WAN1 ~WAN7 as Interface.
To use Advance Mode, do the following steps: 1. Click the Advance Mode radio button. 2. Click Index 1 to access into the following page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Check this box to enable this policy. Comment Type a brief explanation for such profile. Protocol Use the drop-down menu to choose a proper protocol for the WAN interface. Source Any – Any IP can be treated as the source IP. IP Range – Define a range of IP address as source IP addresses.
profile. End - Type an address as the ending IP for such profile. IP Subnet – Define a subnet containing IP address and mask address. Network – Type an IP address here. Mask – Use the drop down list to choose a suitable mask for the network. IP Object / IP Group– Use the drop down list to choose a preconfigured IP object/group. Destination Any – Any IP can be treated as the destination IP. IP Range – Define a range of IP address as destination IP addresses.
via if criteria matched) is down. Priority 3. WAN/LAN – Use the drop down list to choose an interface as an auto failover interface. VPN – Use the drop down list to choose a VPN tunnel as a failover tunnel. Route Policy – Use the drop down list to choose an existed route policy profile. Gateway IP – Specific gateway is used only when you want to forward the packets to the desired gateway. Usually, Default Gateway is selected in default.
Click Diagnose to get the following page. or Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Mode Analyze a single packet – Choose such mode to make Vigor router analyze how a single packet will be sent by a route policy. Analyze multiple packets… - Choose such mode to make Vigor router analyze how multiple packets in a specified file will be sent by a route policy. Packet Information Specify the nature of the packets to be analyzed by Vigor router.
Dst Port – Use the drop down list to specify the destination port. Analyze – Click it to perform the job of analyzing. The analyzed result will be shown on the page. If required, click export analysis to export the result as a file. Input File Select – Click the download link to get a blank example file. Then, click such button to select that blank “.csv” file for saving the result of analysis. Analyze – Click it to perform the job of analyzing. The analyzed result will be shown on the page.
II-6-3 BGP Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is a standardized protocol designed to exchange routing and reachability information among autonomous systems (AS) on the Internet. II-6-3-1 Basic Settings Set general settings for for local router and neighboring routers. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Local Enable BGP Check the box to enable basic BGP function for local router. Local AS Number Set the AS number for local router.
AS Number Display the AS Number for neighboring router. Profile Name Display the name of the neighboring profile. IP Address Display the IP address specified for the neighboring profile. MD5 Auth Display the status (enabled or disabled) of MD5 authentication. Status Display the connection status for local router and neighboring router. II-6-3-1 Static Network This page allows you to configure up to eight neighboring routers for exchanging the routing information with the local router.
Application Notes A-1 How to set up Address Mapping with Route Policy? Address Mapping is used to map a specified private IP or a range of private IPs of NAT subnet into a specified WAN IP (or WAN IP alias IP). Refer to the following figure. This document introduces how to set up address mapping with Route Policy. When a WAN interface has multiple public IP addresses, Administrator may specify the outgoing IP for certain internal IP address by a Route Policy. 1. Set up WAN IP Alias.
2. 3. 264 Go to Load Balance/Route policy. Create a Route Policy for specific IP address to send from specific WAN IP Address. Enable this policy. Enter Source IP as the range of private IP address. Leave the Destination IP and Port as Any. Select Interface as WAN, and then select Interface address from the drop-down list. (The List can be edited in WAN IP Alias setting.) Enable Failover to other WAN so the traffic will be sent via other Interface when the path fails.
A-2 How to use destination domain name in a route policy? Route Policy supports using a domain name as destination criteria. It provides a more direct way to set up route polices if the network administrator is trying to specify the gateway for the traffic that destined for a certain website. To use a destination domain name as criteria, just select Domain Name as Destination in Criteria, and enter the domain name in the empty field.
Auto-create String Objects If you manually enter the domain name in a route policy, after clicking OK to apply the route policy, those domain names will be given a number. That means the router has automatically created string objects for those domain names, so that they can be used in other route policies or other functions.
A-3 How to use a Public IP on LAN We cannot disable NAT on Vigor Router, but still, we may can use a public IP address on a host behind Vigor Router. If our ISP allocates a block public IP addresses for us, then we may use the public IP address with IP Routed Subnet or Routing Usage LAN. Suppose ISP provides a public IP subnet 211.100.200.152/255.255.255.248 for us, and the gateway IP is 211.100.200.158. The public IP addresses we can use are between 211.100.200.153 to 211.100.200.157.
Routing Usage LAN IP Routed LAN Setup 1. Go to LAN >> General Setup, click on Details Page for IP Routed Subnet. 2. Set up TCP/IP details for IP Routed Subnet. a. Enable IP Routed Subnet. b. Enter the IP Address for the router. Note that this could be the same as router's WAN IP. c. Enter the Subnet Mask according to ISP. 3. For the host behind Vigor Router to obtain the public IP address, we may: a. Configure a fixed IP/Subnet Mask on the host b.
c. Set up DHCP IP pool, enable Use MAC Address, add the host's MAC address to the table, and connect the host to the router from any of the LAN ports. After finishing above configurations, host with a public IP 211.100.200.154/ mask 255.255.255.248/ Gateway IP 211.100.200.153 will be able to access Internet through Vigor Router. Routing Usage LAN We may also create a LAN subnet for routing usage. Here we take LAN 2 for example. 1. Go to LAN >> VLAN, a. Enable VLAN Configuration. b.
2. Go to LAN >> General Setup, click on Details Page for LAN 2. 3. Set up TCP/IP details for LAN 2, a. Enable LAN2. b. Select For Routing Usage. c. Enter the IP Address for the router. Note that this could be the same as router's WAN IP. d. Enter the Subnet Mask according to ISP. 4. 270 For DHCP Server Configuration, we may either: Disable DHCP Server, and manually set a fixed IP/Subnet Mask on the host.
After finishing the above configurations, PC or Server that connects to Port 5 or Port 6 with IP settings as IP 211.100.200.154/ mask 255.255.255.252/ Gateway IP 211.100.200.153 will be able to access Internet through Vigor Router. Trouble-shooting If PC with public IP address setting cannot access Internet after above configuration, please check: If the public IP address has been used by another device.
A-4 Introduction to Load Balance/Route Policy This document introduces the Load-Balance/Route Policy. This feature allows network administrator to manage the outbound traffic more specifically. The Policy set in Load-Balance/Route Policy always has higher priority than Default Route and Auto Load Balance set in WAN >> General Setup, and always has lower priority than the Firewall Rules. Administrator may also define a priority to this policy.
The above configuration is an example that if a packet is sent from192.168.1.10~192.168.1.100 to 8.8.8.8, no matter what the protocol or destination port is, it will follow this route policy. 2. Next, we select an interface and gateway through which should the packet be sent if it matches the criteria. a. Select an Interface. b. Select a Gateway IP. Note that if Interface is chosen to be a LAN, it is necessary to designate a specific gateway.
274 Priority: Administrator may set priority between 1 and 249 for this Route policy, where smaller number indicates higher priority. When two policies are having the same priority, the first (according to the policy index order) matched policy will be implemented.
II-7 LTE LTE WAN with SIM card can provide convinent Internet access for Vigor router. However, we can't stop thinking about what can Vigor router utilize this SIM card to provide more useful functions for user? Now, we have developed some useful functions for user, such as sending SMS from a router to report router status, rebooting router remotely via SMS with taking security into consideration, and so on. This section can guide you to use the SIM card in LTE WAN to perform SMS related operations.
Web User Interface II-7-1 General Settings This page allows you to configure general settings for LTE. When SMS Quota Limit is enabled, you can specify the number of SMS quota, actions to perform when quota exceeded, and the period of resetting SMS quota used. II-7-1-1 SMS Quota Available settings are explained as follows: 276 Item Description Enable SMS Quota Limit Check the box to enable such feature. Quota Limit Specify the maximum number of sending SMS for LTE.
starting day in one month. The number of SMS sent will be reset. Custom This setting allows the user to define the billing cycle according to his request. The number of SMS sent will be reset with an interval of cycle duration. Custom – Monthly is default setting. If long period or a short period is required, use Custom. The period of reset is between 1 day and 60 days. You can determine the cycle duration by specifying the days and the hours.
II-7-2 SMS Inbox This page will list the received SMS messages in the LTE SIM card. The SMS Inbox table shows the received date, the phone number or sender ID where this message was from, and the beginning of the message content. Since the data size of one SMS is limited, a long message will be sent by multiple SMS. For the convenience of users, we provide two modes. Simple Mode lists SMS messages in order for received time. Advanced Mode lists SMS in order for real index in the SIM card.
Message Content - Display the full content of the message. OK - Return to previous page. Delete - Click it to delete this message and return to previous page. Next - Click it to see the content of next message. II-7-2-1 Advanced Mode Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Mark as Read Those SMS in "unread" state are shown in bold text. If you want to change SMS into "read" state, select them and click the OK button.
Message Content - Display the full content of the message. OK - Return to previous page. Delete - Click it to delete all SMS of this message and return to previous page. Next - Click it to see the content of next SMS index.
II-7-3 Send SMS This page is used to send SMS messages by the LTE SIM card. It also displays the number of SMS required to send the message. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Recipient Number Type the phone number of the recipient. The format can be an international phone number ( +8869123455678) or a general phone number(0912345678). Data Coding Scheme The router will automatically select a suitable Data Coding Scheme according to the current content in Message.
II-7-4 Router Commands This page allows the user to set function to reboot Vigor router remotely and get the router status via SMS. Go to LTE>>Router Commands to get the following page.
PIN authentication for any mobile phone). The password shall be composed by letters, numbers and baseline. Access Control List Check the box to type or modify (up to 3) phone numbers. The phone number specified here is capable of sending SMS to reboot such Vigor router remotely. Note: If such option is enabled, only mobile phones specified here are allowed to send SMS to reboot Vigor router if correct password is given.
II-7-5 Status Vigor router with LTE function is capable of accessing into Internet and able to send SMS to specified mobile phone. This page will display basic information about the embedded LTE module and the current LTE connection. Each item is explained as follows: 284 Item Description Status LTE WAN status. IMEI International Mobile Equipment Identity of the embedded LTE module. IMSI International Mobile Subscripber Identity of the LTE SIM card.
WLAN 2.4G wireless. If Yes, the interfered 2.4G wireless channels will be indicated. Max Channel TX Rate / Max Channel RX Rate Maximum TX/RX link rate of LTE connection. SMS Centre Number The phone number for SMS service of the LTE SIM card. SMS Service status Whether the SMS service of the LTE SIM card is ready. SMS Loading Whether the received SMS messages in the LTE SIM card have been loaded to the Router. New SMS The number of unread SMS in SMS Inbox.
This page is left blank.
Part III Wireless LAN Wireless LAN enables high mobility so WLAN users can simultaneously access all LAN facilities just like on a wired LAN as well as Internet access.
III-1 Wireless LAN (2.4GHz/5GHz) This function is used for “n” models only. Over recent years, the market for wireless communications has enjoyed tremendous growth. Wireless technology now reaches or is capable of reaching virtually every location on the surface of the earth. Hundreds of millions of people exchange information every day via wireless communication products.
Real-time Hardware Encryption Vigor Router is equipped with a hardware AES encryption engine so it can apply the highest protection to your data without influencing user experience. Complete Security Standard Selection To ensure the security and privacy of your wireless communication, we provide several prevailing standards on market. WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a legacy method to encrypt each frame transmitted via radio using either a 64-bit or 128-bit key.
DFS Restrictions Some of 5GHz channels are DFS channels which are governed radars. Without passing DFS certificate test, we can not open those DFS channels in Vigor router. We are working on DFS certification in Europe and open those channels by releasing new firmware once we receive DFS certification. According to DFS certificate in Europe, we will open channels 52, 56, 60, 64, 100, 104, 108, 112, 116, 120, 124, 128, 132, 136 and 140.
Web User Interface III-1-1 Wireless Wizard The wireless wizard allows you to configure settings specified for a host AP (for home use or internal use for a company) and specified for a guest AP (for any wireless clients accessing into Internet). Follow the steps listed below: 1. Open Wizards>>Wireless Wizard. 2. The screen of wireless wizard will be shown as follows. This page will be used for internal users in a company or your home.
Item Description Wireless 2.4GHz Settings Name Type the SSID name of this router for wireless 2.4GHz. The default name is defined with DrayTek. Change the name if required. Mode At present, the router can connect to 11b Only, 11g Only, 11n Only (2.4GHz), Mixed (11b+11g), Mixed (11g+11n), and Mixed (11b+11g+11n) stations simultaneously. Simply choose Mix (11b+11g+11n) mode. Channel Means the channel of frequency of the wireless LAN. The default channel is 6.
Next Click it to get into the next setting page. Cancel Exit the wireless wizard without saving any changes. 3. After typing the required information, click Next. The settings in the page limit the wireless station (guest) accessing into Internet but not being allowed to share the LAN network and VPN connection. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Wireless 2.4GHz Settings Enable/Disable Click it to enable or disable settings in this page.
above SSID Type the SSID name of this router. (SSID2) Security Key The wireless mode offered by this wizard is WPA2/PSK. The WPA encrypts each frame transmitted from the radio using the key, which either PSK (Pre-Shared Key) entered manually in this field below or automatically negotiated via 802.1x authentication. Either 8~63 ASCII characters, such as 012345678(or 64 Hexadecimal digits leading by 0x, such as "0x321253abcde..."). Next Click it to get into the next setting page.
III-1-2 General Setup By clicking the Wireless LAN>>General Setup, a new web page will appear so that you could configure the SSID and the wireless channel. Please refer to the following figure for more information. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Wireless LAN Check the box to enable wireless function. Mode For 2.4GHz: At present, the router can connect to 11b Only, 11g Only, 11n Only(2.
Channel Means the channel of frequency of the wireless LAN. The default channel is 6 (for 2.4GHz) / 36 (for 5GHz). You may switch channel if the selected channel is under serious interference. If you have no idea of choosing the frequency, please select Auto to let system determine for you. For 2.4GHz: For 5 GHz: Hide SSID Check it to prevent from wireless sniffing and make it harder for unauthorized clients or STAs to join your wireless LAN.
III-1-3 Security This page allows you to set security with different modes for SSID 1, 2, 3 and 4 respectively. After configuring the correct settings, please click OK to save and invoke it. The password (PSK) of default security mode is provided and stated on the label pasted on the bottom of the router. For the wireless client who wants to access into Internet through such router, please input the default PSK value for connection.
Mode There are several modes provided for you to choose. Info You should also set Wireless LAN(2.4GHz) 802.1X Setting simultaneously if 802.1x mode is selected. Disable - Turn off the encryption mechanism. WEP-Accepts only WEP clients and the encryption key should be entered in WEP Key. WEP/802.1x Only - Accepts only WEP clients and the encryption key is obtained dynamically from RADIUS server with 802.1X protocol. WPA/802.
order to prevent key reinstallation attack. WEP 64-Bit - For 64 bits WEP key, either 5 ASCII characters, such as 12345 (or 10 hexadecimal digitals leading by 0x, such as 0x4142434445.) 128-Bit - For 128 bits WEP key, either 13 ASCII characters, such as ABCDEFGHIJKLM (or 26 hexadecimal digits leading by 0x, such as 0x4142434445464748494A4B4C4D). All wireless devices must support the same WEP encryption bit size and have the same key.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Mac Address Filter Select to enable the MAC Address filter for wireless LAN identified with SSID 1 to 4 respectively. All the clients (expressed by MAC addresses) listed in the box can be grouped under different wireless LAN. For example, they can be grouped under SSID 1 and SSID 2 at the same time if you check SSID 1 and SSID 2. MAC Address Filter Display all MAC addresses that are edited before.
III-1-5 WPS WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) provides easy procedure to make network connection between wireless station and wireless access point (vigor router) with the encryption of WPA and WPA2. Info WPS is available for the wireless station with WPS supported. It is the simplest way to build connection between wireless network clients and vigor router. Users do not need to select any encryption mode and type any long encryption passphrase to setup a wireless client every time.
On the side of Vigor 2862 series which served as an AP, press WPS button once on the front panel of the router or click Start PBC on web configuration interface. On the side of a station with network card installed, press Start PBC button of network card. If you want to use PIN code, you have to know the PIN code specified in wireless client. Then provide the PIN code of the wireless client you wish to connect to the vigor router.
Below shows Wireless LAN>>WPS web page: Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable WPS Check this box to enable WPS setting. WPS Status Display related system information for WPS. If the wireless security (encryption) function of the router is properly configured, you can see ‘Configured’ message here. SSID Display the SSID1 of the router. WPS is supported by SSID1 only. Authentication Mode Display current authentication mode of the router.
III-1-6 WDS WDS means Wireless Distribution System. It is a protocol for connecting two access points (AP) wirelessly. Usually, it can be used for the following application: Provide bridge traffic between two LANs through the air. Extend the coverage range of a WLAN. To meet the above requirement, two WDS modes are implemented in Vigor router. One is Bridge, the other is Repeater.
Click WDS from Wireless LAN menu. The following page will be shown. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Mode Choose the mode for WDS setting. Disable mode will not invoke any WDS setting. Bridge mode is designed to fulfill the first type of application. Repeater mode is for the second one.
Security There are three types for security, Disable and Pre-shared key. The setting you choose here will make the following WEP or Pre-shared key field valid or not. Choose one of the types for the router. Pre-shared Key Type – There are some types for you to choose. WPA and WPA2 are used for WDS devices (e.g.2920n wireless router, you can set the encryption mode as WPA or WPA2 to establish your WDS system between AP and the router.
III-1-7 Advanced Setting This page allows users to set advanced settings such as operation mode, channel bandwidth, guard interval, and aggregation MSDU for wireless data transmission. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Operation Mode Mixed Mode – the router can transmit data with the ways supported in both 802.11a/b/g and 802.11n standards. However, the entire wireless transmission will be slowed down if 802.11g or 802.11b wireless client is connected.
128 bit sync field. However, some original 11b wireless network devices only support long preamble. Click Enable to use Long Preamble if needed to communicate with this kind of devices. TX Power Set the power percentage for transmission signal of access point. The greater the value is, the higher intensity of the signal will be. WMM Capable WMM is an abbreviation of Wi-Fi Multimedia. It defines the priority levels for four access categories derived from 802.1d (prioritization tabs).
III-1-8 Station Control Station Control is used to specify the duration for the wireless client to connect and reconnect Vigor router. If such function is not enabled, the wireless client can connect Vigor router until the router shuts down. Such feature is especially useful for free Wi-Fi service. For example, a coffee shop offers free Wi-Fi service for its guests for one hour every day. Then, the connection time can be set as “1 hour” and reconnection time can be set as “1 day”.
III-1-9 Bandwidth Management The downstream or upstream from FTP, HTTP or some P2P applications will occupy large of bandwidth and affect the applications for other programs. Please use Bandwidth Management to make the bandwidth usage more efficient. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description SSID Display the specific SSID name. Enable Check this box to enable the bandwidth management for clients.
III-1-10 AP Discovery Vigor router can scan all regulatory channels and find working APs in the neighborhood. Based on the scanning result, users will know which channel is clean for usage. Also, it can be used to facilitate finding an AP for a WDS link. Notice that during the scanning process (about 5 seconds), no client is allowed to connect to Vigor. This page is used to scan the existence of the APs on the wireless LAN. Yet, only the AP which is in the same channel of this router can be found.
III-1-11 Airtime Fairness Airtime fairness is essential in wireless networks that must support critical enterprise applications. Most of the applications are either symmetric or require more downlink than uplink capacity; telephony and email send the same amount of data in each direction, while video streaming and web surfing involve more traffic sent from access points to clients than the other way around.
It is similar to automatic Bandwidth Limit. The dynamic bandwidth limit of each station depends on instant active station number and airtime assignment. Please note that Airtime Fairness of 2.4GHz and 5GHz are independent. But stations of different SSIDs function together, because they all use the same wireless channel. IN SPECIFIC ENVIRONMENTS, this function can reduce the bad influence of slow wireless devices and improve the overall wireless performance. Suitable environment: (1) Many wireless stations.
III-1-12 Band Steering Band Steering detects if the wireless clients are capable of 5GHz operation, and steers them to that frequency. It helps to leave 2.4GHz band available for legacy clients, and improves users experience by reducing channel utilization. If dual-band is detected, the AP will let the wireless client connect to less congested wireless LAN, such as 5GHz to prevent from network congestion. Info 314 To make Band Steering work successfully, SSID and security on 2.
Open Wireless LAN (2.4GHz)>>Band Steering to get the following web page: Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Band Steering If it is enabled, Vigor router will detect if the wireless client is capable of dual-band or not within the time limit. Check Time…. – If the wireless station does not have the capability of 5GHz network connection, the system shall wait and check for several seconds (15 seconds, in default) to make the 2.4GHz network connection.
How to Use Band Steering? 1. Open Wireless LAN(2.4GHz)>>Band Steering. 2. Check the box of Enable Band Steering and use the default value (15) for check time setting. 3. Click OK to save the settings. 4. Open Wireless LAN (2.4GHz)>>General Setup and Wireless LAN (5GHz)>> General Setup. Configure SSID as DrayTek2862_BandSteering for both pages. Click OK to save the settings. Same settings for 2.
5. Open Wireless LAN (2.4GHz)>>Security and Wireless LAN (5GHz)>>Security. Configure Security as 12345678 for both pages. Click OK to save the settings. Same value for 2.4GHz and 5GHz 6. Now, Vigor router will let the wireless clients connect to less congested wireless LAN, such as 5GHz to prevent from network congestion.
III-1-13 Roaming The network signal for a single wireless access point might be limited by its coverage range. Therefore, if you want to expand the wireless network in a large exhibition with a quick method, you can install multiple access points with enabling the Roaming feature for each AP to reach the purpose of expanding wireless signals seamlessly. These access points connecting for each other shall be verified by pre-authentication.
III-1-14 Station List Station List provides the knowledge of connecting wireless clients now along with its status code. Each tab (general, advanced, neighbor) will display different status information (including IP address, MAC address, Associated with, AID, RSSI, Rate, BW, PSM, WMM, PhMd, MCS, Venfor, Approx. Distance, SSID, Visit Time and so on). Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Refresh Click this button to refresh the status of station list.
This page is left blank.
Part IV VoIP Voice over IP network (VoIP) enables you to use your broadband Internet connection to make toll quality voice calls over the Internet.
IV-1 VoIP Voice over IP network (VoIP) enables you to use your broadband Internet connection to make toll quality voice calls over the Internet. Info This function is used for “V” models. There are many different call signaling protocols, methods by which VoIP devices can talk to each other. The most popular protocols are SIP, MGCP, Megaco and H.323. These protocols are not all compatible with each other (except via a soft-switch server).
The major benefit of this mode is that you don’t have to memorize your friend’s IP address, which might change very frequently if it’s dynamic. Instead of that, you will only have to using dial plan or directly dial your friend’s account name if you are with the same SIP Registrar. Peer-to-Peer Before calling, you have to know your friend’s IP Address. The Vigor VoIP Routers will build connection between each other.
Web User Interface IV-1-1 VoIP Wizard Vigor router offers a quick method to configure settings for VoIP application. Follow the steps listed below. Info This wizard is available for “V” model only. 1. Open Wizards>>VoIP Wizard. 2. The screen of VoIP Wizard will be shown as follows. Available settings are explained as follows: 324 Item Description Set VoIP service provider domain VoIP service provider - Use the drop down list to choose the ISP which offers the VoIP service for your router.
your ISP. Use the same Account as phone 1 – If you don’t need to configure Phone 2 settings, simply check this box. Next Click it to get into the next setting page. Cancel Click it to give up the VoIP wizard. 3. After finished the settings above, click Next for viewing summary of such connection. 4. Click Finish. A page of VoIP Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear.
IV-1-2 General Settings Open VoIP>>General Settings. The following page will appear. Check the box of Enable VoIP and click OK to open the configuration page. If not, no settings will be displayed. After checking the box and click OK, the following page appears for you to configure secure phone, IP call; and set NAT Traversal Setting, RTP for the VoIP function.
NAT Traversal Setting STUN Server - Type in the IP address or domain of the STUN server. External IP - Type in the gateway IP address. SIP PING interval - The default value is 150 (sec). It is useful for a Nortel server NAT Traversal Support. RTP Symmetric RTP – Check this box to invoke the function.
Info 328 If the incoming or outgoing calls do not match any entry on the phonebook, the router will try to make the call "being protected". But, if the call ends up "unprotected"(e.g. peer side does not support ZRTP+SRTP), the router will not play out a warning message.
IV-1-3 SIP Accounts In this section, you set up your own SIP settings. When you apply for an account, your SIP service provider will give you an Account Name or user name, SIP Registrar, Proxy, and Domain name. (The last three might be the same in some case). Then you can tell your folks your SIP Address as in Account Name@ Domain name As Vigor VoIP Router is turned on, it will first register with Registrar using AuthorizationUser@Domain/Realm.
the account is failed to register on SIP server. Click any index link to access into the following page for configuring SIP account. Available settings are explained as follows: 330 Item Description Profile Name Assign a name for this profile for identifying. You can type similar name with the domain. For example, if the domain name is draytel.org, then you might set draytel-1 in this field.
SIP Port Set the port number for sending/receiving SIP message for building a session. The default value is 5060. Your peer must set the same value in his/her Registrar. Domain/Realm Set the domain name or IP address of the SIP Registrar server. Proxy Set domain name or IP address of SIP proxy server. By the time you can type :port number after the domain name to specify that port as the destination of data transmission (e.g., nat.draytel.
solution, you can choose this option. Call Forwarding There are four options for you to choose. Disable is to close call forwarding function. Always means all the incoming calls will be forwarded into SIP URL without any reason. Busy means the incoming calls will be forwarded into SIP URL only when the local system is busy. No Answer means if the incoming calls do not receive any response, they will be forwarded to the SIP URL by the time out. SIP URL – Type in the SIP URL (e.g., aaa@draytel.
Voice Active Detector This function can detect if the voice on both sides is active or not. If not, the router will do something to save the bandwidth for other using. Click On to invoke this function; click off to close the function. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
IV-1-4 DialPlan This page allows you to set phone book, digit map, call barring, regional settings and PSTN setup for the VoIP function. Click the links on this page to access into next pages for detailed settings. IV-1-4-1 Phone Book In this section, you can set your VoIP contacts in the “phonebook”. It can help you to make calls quickly and easily by using “speed-dial” Phone Number. There are total 60 index entries in the phonebook for you to store all your friends and family members’ SIP addresses.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Click this to enable this entry. Phone Number The speed-dial number of this index. This can be any number you choose, using digits 0-9 and * . Display Name The Caller-ID that you want to be displayed on your friend’s screen. This let your friend can easily know who’s calling without memorizing lots of SIP URL Address. SIP URL Enter your friend’s SIP Address.
IV-1-4-2 Digit Map For the convenience of user, this page allows users to edit prefix number for the SIP account with adding number, stripping number or replacing number. It is used to help user have a quick and easy way to dial out through VoIP interface. Available settings are explained as follows: 336 Item Description Enable Check this box to invoke this setting.
OP Number The front number you type here is the first part of the account number that you want to execute special function (according to the chosen mode) by using the prefix number. Min Len Set the minimal length of the dial number for applying the prefix number settings. Take the above picture (Prefix Table Setup web page) as an example, if the dial number is between 7 and 9, that number can apply the prefix number settings here.
IV-1-4-3 Call Barring Call barring is used to block phone calls coming from the one that is not welcomed. Additionally, you can set advanced settings for call barring such as Block Anonymous, Block Unknown Domain or Block IP Address. For Block Anonymous – this function can block the incoming calls without caller ID on the interface (Phone port) specified in the following window. Such control also can be done based on preconfigured schedules.
Click any index number to display the call barring setup page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Check it to enable this entry. Call Direction Determine the direction for the phone call, IN – incoming call, OUT-outgoing call, IN & OUT – both incoming and outgoing calls. Barring Type Determine the type of the VoIP phone call, URI/URL or number. Specific URI/URL or Specific Number This field will be changed based on the type you selected for barring Type.
IV-1-4-4 Regional This page allows you to process incoming or outgoing phone calls by regional. Default values (common used in most areas) will be shown on this web page. You can change the number based on the region that the router is placed. Available settings are explained as follows: 340 Item Description Enable Regional Check this box to enable this function. Last Call Return [Miss] Sometimes, people might miss some phone calls.
Do Not Distrub [Deact] Dial the number typed in this field to release the DND function. Hide caller ID [Act] Dial the number typed in this field to make your phone number (ID) not displayed on the display panel of remote end. Hide caller ID [Deact] Dial the number typed in this field to release this function. Call Waiting [Act] Dial the number typed in this field to make all the incoming calls waiting for your answer.
IV-1-5 Phone Settings This page allows user to set phone settings for Phone 1 and Phone 2 respectively. However, it changes slightly according to different model you have. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Phone Setting Port – there are two phone ports provided here for you to configure. Phone1/Phone2 allows you to set general settings for PSTN phones. Call Feature – A brief description for call feature will be shown in this field for your reference.
Detailed Settings for Phone Port Click the number link for Phone port, you can access into the following page for configuring Phone settings. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Hotline Check the box to enable it. Type in the SIP URL in the field for dialing automatically when you pick up the phone set. Session Timer Check the box to enable the function. In the limited time that you set in this field, if there is no response, the connecting call will be closed automatically.
communicate, then. Default SIP Account You can set SIP accounts (up to six groups) on SIP Account page. Use the drop down list to choose one of the profile names for the accounts as the default one for this phone setting. Play dial tone only when account registered - Check this box to invoke the function. In addition, you can press the Advanced button to configure tone settings, volume gain, MISC and DTMF mode.
Also, you can specify each field for your necessity. It is recommended for you to use the default settings for VoIP communication. Volume Gain Mic Gain (1-10)/Speaker Gain (1-10) - Adjust the volume of microphone and speaker by entering number from 1- 10. The larger of the number, the louder the volume is. MISC Dial Tone Power Level - This setting is used to adjust the loudness of the dial tone. The smaller the number is, the louder the dial tone is. It is recommended for you to use the default setting.
the DTMF tone and transfer it into SIP form. Then it will be sent to the remote end with SIP message. Payload Type (rfc2833) - Type a number from 96 to 127, the default value was 101. This setting is available for the OutBand (RFC2833) mode. Replace + digit in caller ID to - For international phone call, the phone number could add a '+' sign, for example, +8865972727. However, the caller ID (DTMF type especially) can not display '+' at all.
IDLE - Indicates that the VoIP function is idle. HANG_UP - Indicates that the connection is not established (busy tone). CONNECTING - Indicates that the user is calling out. WAIT_ANS - Indicates that a connection is launched and waiting for remote user’s answer. ALERTING - Indicates that a call is coming. ACTIVE-Indicates that the VoIP connection is launched. Codec Indicates the voice codec employed by present channel. PeerID The present in-call or out-call peer ID (the format may be IP or Domain).
IV-1-7 Diagnostics VoIP Diagnostics is used for diagnosing if VoIP phone failure is caused by different tone or caller ID.
Part V VPN A Virtual Private Network (VPN) is the extension of a private network that encompasses links across shared or public networks like the Internet. In short, by VPN technology, you can send data between two computers across a shared or public network in a manner that emulates the properties of a point-to-point private link. It is a form of VPN that can be used with a standard Web browser. A digital certificate works as an electronic ID, which is issued by a certification authority (CA).
V-1 VPN and Remote Access A Virtual Private Network (VPN) is the extension of a private network that encompasses links across shared or public networks like the Internet. In short, by VPN technology, you can send data between two computers across a shared or public network in a manner that emulates the properties of a point-to-point private link. The VPN built is suitable for: Communication between home office and customer. Secure connection between Teleworker, staff on business trip and main office.
Web User Interface V-1-1 VPN Client Wizard Such wizard is used to configure VPN settings for VPN client. Such wizard will guide to set the LAN-to-LAN profile for VPN dial out connection (from server to client) step by step. 1. Open Wizards>>VPN Client Wizard. The following page will appear. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description LAN-to-LAN Client Mode Selection Choose the client mode.
Please choose a LAN-to-LAN Profile 2. There are 32 VPN profiles for users to set. When you finish the mode and profile selection, please click Next to open the following page. In this page, you have to select suitable VPN type for the VPN client profile. There are six types provided here. Different type will lead to different configuration page. After making the choices for the client profile, please click Next. You will see different configurations based on the selection(s) you made.
When you choose IPsec, you will see the following graphic: When you choose SSL, you will see the following graphic: Vigor2862 Series User’s Guide 353
When you choose L2TP over IPsec (Nice to Have) or L2TP over IPsec (Must), you will see the following graphic: Available settings are explained as follows: 354 Item Description Profile Name Type a name for such profile. The length of the file is limited to 10 characters.
VPN Dial-Out Through Use the drop down menu to choose a proper WAN interface for this profile. This setting is useful for dial-out only. Or WAN1 First/ WAN2 First /WAN3 First (or LTE First) /WAN4 First- While connecting, the router will use WAN1/WAN2/WAN3(or LTE)/WAN4 as the first channel for VPN connection. If WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 (or LTE)/WAN4 fails, the router will use another WAN interface instead.
Local ID – Choose Alternative Subject Name First or Subject Name First. Local Certificate – Use the drop down list to choose one of the certificates for using. You have to configure one certificate at least previously in Certificate Management >> Local Certificate. Otherwise, the setting you choose here will not be effective. 3. IPsec Security Method Medium - Authentication Header (AH) means data will be authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default, this option is active.
Item Description Go to the VPN Connection Management Click this radio button to access VPN and Remote Access>>Connection Management for viewing VPN Connection status. Do another VPN Server Wizard Setup Click this radio button to set another profile of VPN Server through VPN Server Wizard. View more detailed configuration Click this radio button to access VPN and Remote Access>>LAN to LAN for viewing detailed configuration.
V-1-2 VPN Server Wizard Such wizard is used to configure VPN settings for VPN server. Such wizard will guide to set the LAN-to-LAN profile for VPN dial in connection (from client to server) step by step. 1. Open Wizards>>VPN Server Wizard. The following page will appear. Available settings are explained as follows: 358 Item Description VPN Server Mode Selection Choose the direction for the VPN server. Site to Site VPN – To set a LAN-to-LAN profile automatically, please choose Site to Site VPN.
Different Dial-in Type will lead to different configuration page. In addition, adjustable items for each dial-in type will be changed according to the VPN Server Mode (Site to Site VPN and Remote Dial-in User) selected. 2. After making the choices for the server profile, please click Next. You will see different configurations based on the selection you made. Here we take the examples of choosing Remote Dial-In User as the VPN Server Mode.
When you check IPsec, you will see the following graphic: Available settings are explained as follows: 360 Item Description Profile Name Type a name for such profile. The length of the file is limited to 10 characters. User Name This field is used to authenticate for connection when you select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the name is limited to 11 characters.
3. Pre-Shared Key For IPsec/L2TP IPsec authentication, you have to type a pre-shared key. The length of the name is limited to 64 characters. Confirm Pre-Shared Key Type the pre-shared key again for confirmation. Digital Signature (X.509) Check the box of Digital Signature to invoke this function. Peer ID – Choose the peer ID selection from the drop down list. Local ID – Choose Alternative Subject Name First or Subject Name First.
configuration V-1-3 Remote Access Control Enable the necessary VPN service as you need. If you intend to run a VPN server inside your LAN, you should disable the VPN service of Vigor Router to allow VPN tunnel pass through, as well as the appropriate NAT settings, such as DMZ or open port. Open VPN and Remote Access>>Remote Access Control. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
V-1-4 PPP General Setup This submenu only applies to PPP-related VPN connections, such as PPTP, L2TP, L2TP over IPsec. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Dial-In PPP Authentication PAP Only - elect this option to force the router to authenticate dial-in users with the PAP protocol. PAP/CHAP/MS-CHAP/MS-CHAPv2 - Selecting this option means the router will attempt to authenticate dial-in users with the CHAP protocol first.
Maximum MPPE - This option indicates that the router will use the MPPE encryption scheme with maximum bits (128-bit) to encrypt the data. Mutual Authentication (PAP) The Mutual Authentication function is mainly used to communicate with other routers or clients who need bi-directional authentication in order to provide stronger security, for example, Cisco routers. So you should enable this function when your peer router requires mutual authentication.
V-1-5 IPsec General Setup In IPsec General Setup, there are two major parts of configuration. There are two phases of IPsec. Phase 1: negotiation of IKE parameters including encryption, hash, Diffie-Hellman parameter values, and lifetime to protect the following IKE exchange, authentication of both peers using either a Pre-Shared Key or Digital Signature (x.509).
IKE Authentication Method This usually applies to those are remote dial-in user or node (LAN-to-LAN) which uses dynamic IP address and IPsec-related VPN connections such as L2TP over IPsec and IPsec tunnel. There are two methods offered by Vigor router for you to authenticate the incoming data coming from remote dial-in user, Certificate (X.509) and Pre-Shared Key. Certificate for Dial-in –Choose one of the local certificates from the drop down list.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Set to Factory Default Click it to clear all indexes. Index Click the number below Index to access into the setting page of IPsec Peer Identity. Enable Check the box to enable such profile. Name Display the profile name of that index. Click each index to edit one peer digital certificate. There are three security levels of digital signature authentication: Fill each necessary field to authenticate the remote peer.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Profile Name Type the name of the profile. The maximum length of the name you can set is 32 characters. Enable this account Check it to enable such account profile. Accept Any Peer ID Click to accept any peer regardless of its identity. Accept Subject Alternative Name Click to check one specific field of digital signature to accept the peer with matching value. The field can be IP Address, Domain, or E-mail Address.
V-1-7 OpenVPN OpenVPN offers a convenient way for users to build VPN between local end and remote end. With integrating of OpenVPN, Vigor router can help users to achieve more robust, reliable and secure private connections for business needs. There are two advantages of OpenVPN: It can be operated on different systems such as Windows, Linux, and MacOS.
Certificate Authentication If certificate authentication is required for OpenVPN, simply check the box to apply the trusted CA certificate and local certificate for OpenVPN tunnel. Certificate authentication can offer more secure VPN tunnel between the client and the router. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration. V-1-7-2 Client Config The settings on this page can be downloaded as a file.
provider Export Vigor2862 Series User’s Guide The settings in this page can be saved as a file after clicking such button. Later, the downloaded file can be imported to the VPN client for building OpenVPN connection.
V-1-8 Remote Dial-in User You can manage remote access by maintaining a table of remote user profile, so that users can be authenticated to dial-in via VPN connection. You may set parameters including specified connection peer ID, connection type (VPN connection - including PPTP, IPsec Tunnel, and L2TP by itself or over IPsec) and corresponding security methods, etc. The router provides 32 access accounts for dial-in users.
LAN-to-LAN profile. The symbol ??? represents that the profile is empty. Status Display the access state of the specific dial-in user. The symbol V and X represent the specific dial-in user to be active and inactive, respectively. Click each index to edit one remote user profile. Each Dial-In Type requires you to fill the different corresponding fields on the right. If the fields gray out, it means you may leave it untouched. The following explanation will guide you to fill all the necessary fields.
VPN connection through XAuth server in Internet. L2TP with IPsec Policy - Allow the remote dial-in user to make a L2TP VPN connection through the Internet. You can select to use L2TP alone or with IPsec. Select from below: None - Do not apply the IPsec policy. Accordingly, the VPN connection employed the L2TP without IPsec policy can be viewed as one pure L2TP connection. Nice to Have - Apply the IPsec policy first, if it is applicable during negotiation.
can be set when you select IPsec tunnel either with or without specifying the IP address of the remote node. Pre-Shared Key - Check the box of Pre-Shared Key to invoke this function and type in the required characters (1-63) as the pre-shared key. Digital Signature (X.509) – Check the box of Digital Signature to invoke this function and Select one predefined Profiles set in the VPN and Remote Access >>IPsec Peer Identity.
V-1-9 LAN to LAN Here you can manage LAN-to-LAN connections by maintaining a table of connection profiles. You may set parameters including specified connection direction (dial-in or dial-out), connection peer ID, connection type (VPN connection - including PPTP, IPsec Tunnel, and L2TP by itself or over IPsec) and corresponding security methods, etc. The following figure shows the summary table according to the item (All/Trunk) selected for View.
Status Indicate the status of individual profiles. The symbol V and X represent the profile to be active and inactive, respectively. The following shows profiles joined into VPN Load Balance and VPN Backup mechanism. If there is no profile joined yet, this page will be shown as follows: To edit each profile: 1. Click each index to edit each profile and you will get the following page. Each LAN-to-LAN profile includes 4 subgroups. If the fields gray out, it means you may leave it untouched.
Available settings are explained as follows: 378 Item Description Common Settings Profile Name – Specify a name for the profile of the LAN-to-LAN connection. Enable this profile - Check here to activate this profile. VPN Dial-Out Through - Use the drop down menu to choose a proper WAN interface for this profile. This setting is useful for dial-out only.
Pass – click it to have an inquiry for data transmission between the hosts located on both sides of VPN Tunnel while connecting. Block – When there is conflict occurred between the hosts on both sides of VPN Tunnel in connecting, such function can block data transmission of Netbios Naming Packet inside the tunnel. Multicast via VPN - Some programs might send multicast packets via VPN connection. Pass – Click this button to let multicast packets pass through the router. Block – This is default setting.
VPN connection employed the L2TP without IPsec policy can be viewed as one pure L2TP connection. Nice to Have: Apply the IPsec policy first, if it is applicable during negotiation. Otherwise, the dial-out VPN connection becomes one pure L2TP connection. Must: Specify the IPsec policy to be definitely applied on the L2TP connection. User Name - This field is applicable when you select, PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the name is limited to 49 characters.
algorithm and not apply any authentication scheme. AES with Authentication-Use AES encryption algorithm and apply MD5 or SHA-1 authentication algorithm. Advanced - Specify mode, proposal and key life of each IKE phase, Gateway, etc. The window of advance setup is shown as below: IKE phase 1 mode -Select from Main mode and Aggressive mode. The ultimate outcome is to exchange security proposals to create a protected secure channel.
Available settings are explained as follows: 382 Item Description Dial-In Settings Allowed Dial-In Type - Determine the dial-in connection with different types. PPTP - Allow the remote dial-in user to make a PPTP VPN connection through the Internet. You should set the User Name and Password of remote dial-in user below. IPsec Tunnel- Allow the remote dial-in user to trigger an IPsec VPN connection through Internet.
Also, you should further specify the corresponding security methods on the right side. If you uncheck the checkbox, the connection type you select above will apply the authentication methods and security methods in the general settings. Username - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the name is limited to 11 characters. Password - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above.
function can ensure the data transmitted on VPN tunnel is really sent out from both sides. This is an optional function. However, if one side wants to use it, the peer must enable it, too. My GRE IP: Type the virtual IP for router itself for verified by peer. Peer GRE IP: Type the virtual IP of peer host for verified by router. TCP/IP Network Settings My WAN IP –This field is only applicable when you select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The default value is 0.0.0.
the remote network only allows you to dial in with single IP, please choose NAT, otherwise choose Route. Change default route to this VPN tunnel - Check this box to change the default route with this VPN tunnel. IPSec VPN with the Same subnet For both ends (e.g., different sections in a company) are within the same subnet, there is a function which allows you to build Virtual IP mapping between two ends.
specify the local IP address and the mapping virtual IP address. 2. 386 After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
V-1-10 VPN Trunk Management VPN trunk includes four features - VPN Backup, VPN load balance, GRE over IPsec, and Binding tunnel policy. Features of VPN TRUNK – VPN Backup Mechanism VPN TRUNK Management is a backup mechanism which can set multiple VPN tunnels as backup tunnel. It can assure the network connection not to be cut off due to network environment blocked by any reason.
Available settings are explained as follows: 388 Item Description Backup Profile List Set to Factory Default - Click to clear all VPN TRUNK-VPN Backup mechanism profile. No. – The order of VPN TRUNK-VPN Backup mechanism profile. Status - “v” means such profile is enabled; “x” means such profile is disabled. Name - Display the name of VPN TRUNK-VPN Backup mechanism profile. Member1 - Display the dial-out profile selected from the Member1 drop down list below. Active - “Yes” means normal condition.
Advanced – This button is available only when LAN to LAN profile (or more) is created. Detailed information for this dialog, see later section Advanced Load Balance and Backup. Load Balance Profile List Vigor2862 Series User’s Guide Set to Factory Default - Click to clear all VPN TRUNK-VPN Load Balance mechanism profile. No. - The order of VPN TRUNK-VPN Load Balance mechanism profile. Status - “v” means such profile is enabled; “x” means such profile is disabled.
Detailed information for this dialog, see later section Advanced Load Balance and Backup. General Setup Status- After choosing one of the profile listed above, please click Enable to activate this profile. If you click Disable, the selected or current used VPN TRUNK-Backup/Load Balance mechanism profile will not have any effect for VPN tunnel. Profile Name- Type a name for VPN TRUNK profile. Each profile can group two VPN connections set in LAN-to-LAN.
To close two tunnels of load balance after connecting, please click Disable for Status in General Setup field. How can you set a VPN TRUNK-VPN Backup/Load Balance mechanism profile? 1. First of all, go to VPN and Remote Access>>LAN-to-LAN. Set two or more LAN-to-LAN profiles first that will be used for Member1 and Member2. If you do not set enough LAN-to-LAN profiles, you cannot operate VPN TRUNK – VPN Backup /Load Balance mechanism profile management well. 2.
3. Later, on peer side (as VPN Client): please type 192.168.50.100 in the field of My GRE IP and type IP address of the server (192.168.50.200) in the field of Peer GRE IP. Advanced Load Balance and Backup After setting profiles for load balance, you can choose any one of them and click Advance for more detailed configuration. The windows for advanced load balance and backup are different.
Advanced Load Balance Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Profile Name List the load balance profile name. Load Balance Algorithm Round Robin – Based on packet base, both tunnels will send the packet alternatively. Such method can reach the balance of packet transmission with fixed rate. Weighted Round Robin –Such method can reach the balance of packet transmission with flexible rate. It can be divided into Auto Weighted and According to Speed Ratio.
tunnel table. Tunnel Bind Table Index- 128 Binding tunnel tables are provided by this device. Specify the number of the tunnel for such Load Balance profile. Active – In-active/Delete can delete this binding tunnel table. Active can activate this binding tunnel table. Binding Dial Out Index – Specify connection type for transmission by choosing the index (LAN to LAN Profile Index) for such binding tunnel table. Scr IP Start /End– Specify source IP addresses as starting point and ending point.
To configure a successful binding tunnel, you have to: Type Binding Src IP range (Start and End) and Binding Des IP range (Start and End). Choose TCP/UDP, IGMP/ICMP or Other as Binding Protocol. Advanced Backup Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Profile Name List the backup profile name. ERD Mode ERD means “Environment Recovers Detection”.
backup profiles being activated alternatively. Resume – when VPN connection breaks down or disconnects, Member 1 will be the top priority for the system to do VPN connection. Detail Information 396 This field will display detailed information for Environment Recovers Detection.
V-1-11 Connection Management You can find the summary table of all VPN connections. You may disconnect any VPN connection by clicking Drop button. You may also aggressively Dial-out by using Dial-out Tool and clicking Dial button. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Dial-out Tool General Mode - This filed displays the profile configured in LAN-to-LAN (with Index number and VPN Server IP address). The VPN connection built by General Mode does not support VPN backup function.
Application Notes A-1 How to Build a LAN-to-LAN VPN Between Vigor Routers via IPsec Main Mode This document introduces how to set up Main mode IPsec Tunnel between two Vigor Routers.IPsec VPN with Main mode use the IP address of VPN client as identifier, and the IP address must be set on VPN server; therefore, if the VPN client doesn't have a static IP, please use Aggressive mode instead. VPN Server (Dial-In Site) Setup 398 1.
In Common Settings, (a) Enter the Profile Name. (b) Enable this profile. (c) Set Call Direction to Dial-in. In Dial-In Setting, 3. (d) Make sure Allowed Dial-in Type has IPsec Tunnel enabled. (e) Enable Specify Remote VPN Gateway and enter Peer VPN Server IP as the public IP of VPN client router. (f) Click on IKE Pre-Shared Key and enter the Pre-shared Key. (g) Select the IPsec Security Method that are allowed to use.
VPN Client (Dial-out Site) Setup 1. Create a Dial-out profile to VPN server: Go to VPN and Remote Access >> LAN to LAN, click on an available index to add a new profile. 2. Setup the dial-out profile. In Common Settings, (a) Enter a Profile Name. (b) Enable this profile. (c) Set Call Direction to Dial-Out.
(d) Select IPsec Tunnel for Type of Sever I am Calling. (e) Enter VPN Server's WAN IP or domain name in Sever IP/Host Name for VPN. (f) Click IKE Pre-Shared Key and enter the same Pre-Shared key as VPN Server. (g) Click on Advanced in IPsec Security Method. In IKE advanced settings, 3. (h) Select Main Mode for IKE phase 1 mode. (i) Make sure phase 1 and phase 2 proposal are using the security methods which are accepted by VPN server. (j) Click OK to save.
VPN Tunnel Establishment To initiate the VPN connection, go to VPN and Remote Access >> Connection Management on VPN Client. Select the profile to VPN Sever and click Dial. If all the settings are matched, the VPN will be established, and the statistics will be displayed on the same page.
A-2 How to Build a LAN-to-LAN VPN Between Vigor Routers via IKEv2 Modified from the previous version IKEv1, IKEv2 is a new VPN protocol and has lots of improvements then the former. It is more stable, more secure and faster connection establishing speed. Support newer and more complicated secure ciphers to make the connection more secure. Using new connection progress and discard the PPP, IKEv2 provides the faster establishing speed.
(a) Check Enable this profile. (b) Select Dial-in as Call Direction. (c) Allow IPsec Tunnel in Dial-In Settings. (d) Input the IP address of LAN_C as Remote Network IP and Remote Network Mask. (e) Click OK. VPN Client Settings 1. 404 Go to VPN and Remote Access >> LAN to LAN and click an available index. (a) Give a Profile Name. (b) Check Enable this profile. (c) Select Dial-Out as Call Direction. (d) Select IPsec Tunnel with IKEv2 in Dial-Out Settings.
2. (e) Input VPN server's WAN IP or domain name at Server IP/Host Name for VPN. (f) Input Pre-Shard Key of VPN server. In TCP/IP Network Settings, input the IP address of LAN_S as Remote Network IP and Remote Network Mask. Click OK to save the profile. VPN Tunnel Establishment To initiate the VPN connection, go to VPN and Remote Access >> Connection Management. Select the VPN profile and click Dial. After VPN is established successfully, the VPN connection status will be shown below.
V-2 SSL VPN SSL VPN (Secure Sockets Layer virtual private network) is a form of VPN that encrypts traffic using SSL, which is the same technology used on secured websites. Because of SSL’s prominence as an encryption protocol on the Internet, most networks have few restrictions on SSL traffic, and as a result SSL VPN is more likely to work when other VPN technologies experience difficulties due to obstacles such as firewalls and Network Address Translation (NAT).
Web User Interface V-2-1 General Setup The general settings of the SSL VPN Server and SSL Tunnel are entered on this page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Bind to WAN Select the WAN interfaces to accept inbound SSL VPN connections. Port The port to be used for SSL VPN server. This is separate from the management port which is configured in System Maintenance>>Management. The default setting is 443.
V-2-2 User Account With SSL VPN, Vigor2862 series let teleworkers have convenient and simple remote access to central site VPN. The teleworkers do not need to install any VPN software manually. From regular web browser, you can establish VPN connection back to your main office even in a guest network or web cafe. The SSL technology is the same as the encryption that you use for secure web sites such as your online bank. The SSL VPN can be operated in either full tunnel mode or proxy mode.
Click each index to edit one remote user profile. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description User account and Authentication Enable this account - Check the box to enable this function. Idle Timeout- If the dial-in user is idle over the limitation of the timer, the router will drop this connection. By default, the Idle Timeout is set to 300 seconds. User Name - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above.
Item Description Name and Password of remote dial-in user below. IPSec Tunnel - Allow the remote dial-in user to establish IPsec tunnels. IPsec XAuth - Allow the remote dial-in user to establish an IPSec VPN connection through XAuth server in Internet. L2TP with IPSec Policy - Allow the remote dial-in user to establish L2TP VPN connections. You can select to use L2TP alone or with IPSec. Select one of the following options: None - Do not apply the IPSec policy. L2TP connections are not encrypted.
Item Description Key function and enter a string of up to 63 characters as the pre-shared key. Digital Signature (X.509) – Select this checkbox to enable X.509 Digital Signature and choose a predefined profile that has been set in VPN and Remote Access >> IPSec Peer Identity. IPSec Security Method When the remote node is specified, all fields in this section are required for IPsec Tunnels and L2TP connections with IPsec Policy.
V-2-3 User Group Up to 10 user group profiles can be created for authentication by LDAP server. These profiles will be used by applications such as User Management, VPN and etc. Each item is explained as follows: 412 Item Description Set to Factory Default Click to clear all profiles. Index Click the profile index to display its detail setting page. Enable Check the box to enable such profile. Name Display the name of the group profile.
Click any index number link to open the following page for detailed configuration. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Check this box to enable such profile. Group Name Type a name for such profile. The length of the name is limited to 23 characters. Authentication Methods Select the authentication methods to be used for SSL VPN.
V-2-4 SSL Portal Online User If you have finished the configuration of SSL Web Proxy (server), users can find out corresponding settings when they access into DrayTek SSL VPN portal interface. Next, users can open SSL VPN>> SSL Portal Online User to view logging status of SSL VPN. Available settings are explained as follows: 414 Item Description Active User Display the name of the user who is connected to the SSL VPN server. Host IP Display the IP address the user is connected from.
V-3 Certificate Management A digital certificate works as an electronic ID, which is issued by a certification authority (CA). It contains information such as your name, a serial number, expiration dates etc., and the digital signature of the certificate-issuing authority so that a recipient can verify that the certificate is real. Here Vigor router support digital certificates conforming to standard X.509.
Web User Interface V-3-1 Local Certificate Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Generate Click this button to open Generate Certificate Request window. Type in all the information that the window requests. Then click Generate again. Import Click this button to import a saved file as the certification information. Refresh Click this button to refresh the information listed below. View Click this button to view the detailed settings for certificate request.
Info Please be noted that “Common Name” must be configured with router’s WAN IP or domain name. After clicking GENERATE, the generated information will be displayed on the window below: IMPORT Vigor router allows you to generate a certificate request and submit it the CA server, then import it as “Local Certificate”. If you have already gotten a certificate from a third party, you may import it directly. The supported types are PKCS12 Certificate and Certificate with a private key.
Available settings are explained as follows: 418 Item Description Upload Local Certificate It allows users to import the certificate which is generated by Vigor router and signed by CA server. If you have done well in certificate generation, the Status of the certificate will be shown as “OK”. Upload PKCS12 Certificate It allows users to import the certificate whose extensions are usually .pfx or .p12. And these certificates usually need passwords.
REFRESH Click this button to refresh the information listed below. View Click this button to view the detailed settings for certificate request. Info You have to copy the certificate request information from above window. Next, access your CA server and enter the page of certificate request, copy the information into it and submit a request. A new certificate will be issued to you by the CA server. You can save it. Delete Click this button to remove the selected certificate.
V-3-2 Trusted CA Certificate Trusted CA certificate lists three sets of trusted CA certificate. In addition, you can build a RootCA certificate if required. When the local client and remote client are required to make certificate authentication (e.g., IPsec X.509) for data passing through SSL tunnel and avoiding the attack of MITM, a trusted root certificate authority (Root CA) will be used to authenticate the digital certificates offered by both ends.
Importing a Trusted CA To import a pre-saved trusted CA certificate, please click IMPORT to open the following window. Use Browse… to find out the saved text file. Then click Import. The one you imported will be listed on the Trusted CA Certificate window. For viewing each trusted CA certificate, click View to open the certificate detail information window. If you want to delete a CA certificate, choose the one and click Delete to remove all the certificate information.
V-3-3 Certificate Backup Local certificate and Trusted CA certificate for this router can be saved within one file. Please click Backup on the following screen to save them. If you want to set encryption password for these certificates, please type characters in both fields of Encrypt password and Confirm password. Also, you can use Restore to retrieve these two settings to the router whenever you want.
Part VI Security While the broadband users demand more bandwidth for multimedia, interactive applications, or distance learning, security has been always the most concerned. The firewall of the Vigor router helps to protect your local network against attack from unauthorized outsiders. It also restricts users in the local network from accessing the Internet.
VI-1 Firewall While the broadband users demand more bandwidth for multimedia, interactive applications, or distance learning, security has been always the most concerned. The firewall of the Vigor router helps to protect your local network against attack from unauthorized outsiders. It also restricts users in the local network from accessing the Internet. Furthermore, it can filter out specific packets that trigger the router to build an unwanted outgoing connection.
Stateful Packet Inspection (SPI) Stateful inspection is a firewall architecture that works at the network layer. Unlike legacy static packet filtering, which examines a packet based on the information in its header, stateful inspection builds up a state machine to track each connection traversing all interfaces of the firewall and makes sure they are valid. The stateful firewall of Vigor router not only examines the header information also monitors the state of the connection.
Web User Interface Below shows the menu items for Firewall. VI-1-1 General Setup General Setup allows you to adjust settings of IP Filter and common options. Here you can enable or disable the Call Filter or Data Filter. Under some circumstance, your filter set can be linked to work in a serial manner. So here you assign the Start Filter Set only. Also you can configure the Log Flag settings, Apply IP filter to VPN incoming packets, and Accept incoming fragmented UDP packets.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Call Filter Check Enable to activate the Call Filter function. Assign a start filter set for the Call Filter. Data Filter Check Enable to activate the Data Filter function. Assign a start filter set for the Data Filter. Always pass inbound fragmented large packets Some on-line games (for example: Half Life) will use lots of fragmented UDP packets to transfer game data.
Default Rule Page Such page allows you to choose filtering profiles including QoS, Load-Balance policy, WCF, APP Enforcement, URL Content Filter, for data transmission via Vigor router. Available settings are explained as follows: 428 Item Description Filter Select Pass or Block for the packets that do not match with the filter rules. Sessions Control The number typed here is the total sessions of the packets that do not match the filter rule configured in this page. The default setting is 70000.
User Management Such item is available only when Rule-Based is selected in User Management>>General Setup. The general firewall rule will be applied to the user/user group/all users specified here. When there is no user profile or group profile existed, Create New User or Create New Group item will appear for you to click to create a new one. APP Enforcement Select an APP Enforcement profile for global IM/P2P application blocking.
strongly recommended to use the default settings here. Codepage - This function is used to compare the characters among different languages. Choose correct codepage can help the system obtain correct ASCII after decoding data from URL and enhance the correctness of URL Content Filter. The default value for this setting is ANSI 1252 Latin I. If you do not choose any codepage, no decoding job of URL will be processed. Please use the drop-down list to choose a codepage.
VI-1-2 Filter Setup Click Firewall and click Filter Setup to open the setup page. To edit or add a filter, click on the set number to edit the individual set. The following page will be shown. Each filter set contains up to 7 rules. Click on the rule number button to edit each rule. Check Active to enable the rule. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Filter Rule Click a button numbered (1 ~ 7) to edit the filter rule. Click the button will open Edit Filter Rule web page.
Action Display the packets to be passed /blocked. CSM Display the content security managed Move Up/Down Use Up or Down link to move the order of the filter rules. Next Filter Set Set the link to the next filter set to be executed after the current filter run. Do not make a loop with many filter sets. Wizard Mode Allow to configure frequently used settings for filter rule via several setting pages. Advance Mode Allow to configure detailed settings of filter rule.
Protocol Specify the protocol(s) which this filter rule will apply to. Source Port / Destination Port (=) – when the first and last value are the same, it indicates one port; when the first and last values are different, it indicates a range for the port and available for this service type.
applying with this router. Please set at least one profile for anti-virus in CSM>> Web Content Filter web page first. Or choose [Create New] from the drop down list in this page to create a new profile. For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to record information for Web Content Filter by checking the Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to section Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.
To use Advance Mode, do the following steps: 1. Click the Advance Mode radio button. 2. Click Index 1 to access into the following page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Check this box to enable the filter rule. Comments Enter filter set comments/description. Maximum length is 14- character long. Schedule Profile Set PCs on LAN to work at certain time interval only.
Note: RT means routing domain for 2nd subnet or other LAN. Source IP/ Country and Destination IP / Country Click Edit to access into the following dialog to choose the source/destination IP or IP ranges. To set the IP address manually, please choose Any Address/Single Address/Range Address/Subnet Address as the Address Type and type them in this dialog. In addition, if you want to use the IP range from defined groups or objects, please choose Group and Objects as the Address Type.
To set the service type manually, please choose User defined as the Service Type and type them in this dialog. In addition, if you want to use the service type from defined groups or objects, please choose Group and Objects as the Service Type. Protocol - Specify the protocol(s) which this filter rule will apply to.
Pass If No Further Match - A packet matching the rule, and that does not match further rules, will be passed through. Branch to other Filter Set If the packet matches the filter rule, the next filter rule will branch to the specified filter set. Select next filter rule to branch from the drop-down menu. Be aware that the router will apply the specified filter rule for ever and will not return to previous filter rule any more.
record information for URL Content Filter by checking the Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to section Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information. Web Content Filter Select one of the Web Content Filter profile settings (created in CSM>> Web Content Filter) for applying with this router. Please set at least one profile for anti-virus in CSM>> Web Content Filter web page first. Or choose [Create New] from the drop down list in this page to create a new profile.
Window size – It determines the size of TCP protocol (0~65535). The more the value is, the better the performance will be. However, if the network is not stable, small value will be proper. Session timeout–Setting timeout for sessions can make the best utilization of network resources. However, Queue timeout is configured for TCP protocol only; session timeout is configured for the data flow which matched with the firewall rule.
VI-1-3 Defense Setup As a sub-functionality of IP Filter/Firewall, there are 15 types of detect/ defense function in the DoS Defense setup. The DoS Defense functionality is disabled for default. VI-1-3-1 DoS Defense Click Firewall and click DoS Defense to open the setup page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Dos Defense Check the box to activate the DoS Defense Functionality. Select All - Click this button to select all the items listed below.
442 Enable UDP flood defense Check the box to activate the UDP flood defense function. Once detecting the Threshold of the UDP packets from the Internet has exceeded the defined value, the Vigor router will start to randomly discard the subsequent UDP packets for a period defined in Timeout. The default setting for threshold and timeout are 2000 packets per second and 10 seconds, respectively.
Activating the DoS/DDoS defense functionality might block some legal packets. For example, when you activate the fraggle attack defense, all broadcast UDP packets coming from the Internet are blocked. Therefore, the RIP packets from the Internet might be dropped. Block TCP flag scan Check the box to activate the Block TCP flag scan function. Any TCP packet with anomaly flag setting is dropped. Those scanning activities include no flag scan, FIN without ACK scan, SYN FINscan, Xmas scan and full Xmas scan.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration. VI-1-3-2 Spoofing Defense Click the Spoofing Defense tab to open the setup page.
VI-1-4 Diagnose The purpose of this function is to test when the router receiving incoming packet, which firewall rule will be applied to that packet. The test result, including firewall rule profile, IP address translation in packet transmission, state of the firewall fuctions and etc., also will be shown on this page. Info The result obtained by using Diagnose is offered for RD debug. It will be different according to actual state such as netework connection, LAN/WAN settings and so on.
Dst IP Type the IPv4/IPv6 address of the packet’s destination. Dst Port Type the port number of the packet’s destination. Packet & Payload In firewall diagnose, two packets belong to one connection. In general, two packets are enough for Vigor router to perform this test. Enable – Check the box to send out the test packet. Direction – The first packet of the firewall test will follow the direction specified above. However, the direction for the second packet might be different.
The following figure shows the test result after clicking Analyze. Processing state for the fuctions (MAC Filter, QoS, User management, etc.,) related to the firewall will be displayed by green or red LED.
Application Notes A-1 How to Configure Certain Computers Accessing to Internet We can specify certain computers (e.g., 192.168.1.10 ~ 192.168.1.20) accessing to Internet through Vigor router. Others (e.g., 192.168.1.31 and 192.168.1.32) outside the range can get the source from LAN only. The way we can use is to set two rules under Firewall. For Rule 1 of Set 2 under Firewall>>Filter Setup is used as the default setting, we have to create a new rule starting from Filter Rule 2 of Set 2. 448 1.
3. Check the box of Check to enable the Filter Rule. Type the comments (e.g., block_all). Choose Block If No Further Match for the Filter setting. Then, click OK. Info In default, the router will check the packets starting with Set 2, Filter Rule 2 to Filter Rule 7. If Block If No Further Match for is selected for Filter, the firewall of the router would check the packets with the rules starting from Rule 3 to Rule 7. The packets not matching with the rules will be processed according to Rule 2. 4.
450 6. A dialog box will be popped up. Choose Range Address as Address Type by using the drop down list. Type 192.168.1.10 in the field of Start IP, and type 192.168.1.20 in the field of End IP. Then, click OK to save the settings. The computers within the range can access into the Internet. 7. Now, check the content of Source IP is correct or not. The action for Filter shall be set with Pass Immediately. Then, click OK to save the settings.
8. Both filter rules have been created. Click OK. Now, all the settings are configured well. Only the computers with the IP addresses within 192.168.1.10 ~ 192.168.1.20 can access to Internet.
VI-2 Central Security Management (CSM) CSM is an abbreviation of Central Security Management which is used to control IM/P2P usage, filter the web content and URL content to reach a goal of security management. APP Enforcement Filter As the popularity of all kinds of instant messenger application arises, communication cannot become much easier.
Web User Interface VI-2-1 APP Enforcement Profile You can define policy profiles for IM (Instant Messenger)/VoIP/ P2P (Peer to Peer)/Protocol/Tunneling/Stream/Remote Control/Web HD application. This page allows you to set 32 profiles for different requirements. The APP Enforcement Profile will be applied in Default Rule of Firewall>>General Setup for filtering. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles.
Click the number under Index column for settings in detail. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Profile Name Type a name for the CSM profile. The maximum length of the name you can set is 15 characters. Select All Click it to choose all of the items in this page. Clear All Uncheck all the selected boxes. Enable Check the box to select the application to be blocked by Vigor router.
VI-2-2 APPE Signature Upgrade The APPE Enforcement Profile adopted by Vigor router will be treated as the APPE signature. DrayTek will periodically upgrade versions for all of the APPs supported by Vigor router. However, it might be inconvenient for users to upgrade the APP version one by one. This feature is specially designed to offer a quick method to execute APP version upgrade.
Upgrade and wait for the system completing the process. Upgrade Automatically Scheduled Update - Check the box to make Vigor router upgrading the APPE signature based on the schedule configured here. After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration.
VI-2-3 URL Content Filter Profile To provide an appropriate cyberspace to users, Vigor router equips with URL Content Filter not only to limit illegal traffic from/to the inappropriate web sites but also prohibit other web feature where malicious code may conceal. Once a user type in or click on an URL with objectionable keywords, URL keyword blocking facility will decline the HTTP request to that web page thus can limit user’s access to the website.
Administration Message You can type the message manually for your necessity. Default Message - You can type the message manually for your necessity or click this button to get the default message which will be displayed on the field of Administration Message. You can set eight profiles as URL content filter. Simply click the index number under Profile to open the following web page. Available settings are explained as follows: 458 Item Description Profile Name Type a name for the CSM profile.
first, then URL second. Log None – There is no log file will be recorded for this profile. Pass – Only the log about Pass will be recorded in Syslog. Block – Only the log about Block will be recorded in Syslog. All – All the actions (Pass and Block) will be recorded in Syslog. URL Access Control Enable URL Access Control - Check the box to activate URL Access Control. Note that the priority for URL Access Control is higher than Restrict Web Feature.
Web Feature Enable Restrict Web Feature - Check this box to make the keyword being blocked or passed. Action - This setting is available only when Either: URL Access Control First or Either: Web Feature First is selected. Pass - Allow accessing into the corresponding webpage with the keywords listed on the box below. Block - Restrict accessing into the corresponding webpage with the keywords listed on the box below.
VI-2-4 Web Content Filter Profile There are three ways to activate WCF on vigor router, using Service Activation Wizard, by means of CSM>>Web Content Filter Profile or via System Maintenance>>Activation. Service Activation Wizard allows you to use trial version of WCF directly without accessing into the server (MyVigor) located on http://myvigor.draytek.com.
Available settings are explained as follows: 462 Item Description Activate Click it to access into MyVigor for activating WCF service. Setup Query Server It is recommended for you to use the default setting, auto-selected. You need to specify a server for categorize searching when you type URL in browser based on the web content filter profile. Find more- Click it to open http://myvigor.draytek.com for searching another qualified and suitable server.
access via WCF. If the data has been accessed previously, the IP addresses of source and destination IDs will be memorized for a short time (about 1 second) in the router. When the user tries to access the same destination ID, the router will check it by comparing the record stored. If it matches, the page will be retrieved quickly. Such item can provide URL matching with the fastest rate. L1+L2 Cache – the router will check the URL with fast processing rate combining the feature of L1 and L2.
Log None – There is no log file will be recorded for this profile. Pass – Only the log about Pass will be recorded in Syslog. Block – Only the log about Block will be recorded in Syslog. All – All the actions (Pass and Block) will be recorded in Syslog. Black/White List Enable – Activate white/black list function for such profile. URL Keywords – Click Edit to choose the group or object profile as the content of white/black list.
VI-2-5 DNS Filter Profile The DNS Filter monitors DNS queries on UDP port 53 and will pass the DNS query information to the WCF to help with categorizing HTTPS URL's. DNS can be specified in LAN>>General Setup by using the server (e.g., 168.95.1.1) on router or external DNS server (e.g., 8.8.8.8). If the router server is used, DNS Filter General Setting will be applied to DNS query from clients on LAN.
Item Description DNS Filter Profile Table It displays a list of different DNS filter profiles (with specified WCF and UCF). Click the profile link to open the following page. Then, type the name of the profile and specify WCF/UCF based on your requirement. DNS Filter Local Setting DNS Filter Local Setting will be applied to DNS query from clients on LAN when router’s DNS server is used. DNS Filter - Check Enable to enable such feature.
Application Notes A-1 How to Create an Account for MyVigor The website of MyVigor (a server located on http://myvigor.draytek.com) provides several useful services (such as Anti-Spam, Web Content Filter, Anti-Intrusion, and etc.) to filtering the web pages for the sake of protecting your system. To access into MyVigor for getting more information, please create an account for MyVigor. Create an Account via Vigor Router 1. Click CSM>> Web Content Filter Profile. The following page will appear.
2. Click the Activate link. A login page for MyVigor web site will pop up automatically. 3. Click the link of Create an account now. 4. The system will ask if you are 16 years old or over. 468 If yes, click I am 16 or over.
If not, click I am under 16 years old to get the following page. Then, click I and my legal guardian agree. 5. After reading the terms of service/privacy policy, click Agree. 6. In the following page, enter your personal information in this page and then click Continue.
7. Choose proper selection for your computer and click Continue. 8. Now you have created an account successfully. 9. Check to see the confirmation email with the title of New Account Confirmation Letter from myvigor.draytek.com. 10. Click the Activate my Account link to enable the account that you created. The following screen will be shown to verify the register process is finished. Please click Login.
11. When you see the following page, please type in the account and password (that you just created) in the fields of UserName and Password. 12. Now, click Login. Your account has been activated. You can access into MyVigor server to activate the service (e.g., WCF) that you want.
A-2 How to Block Facebook Service Accessed by the Users via Web Content Filter / URL Content Filter There are two ways to block the facebook service, Web Content Filter and URL Content Filter. Web Content Filter, Benefits: Easily and quickly implement the category/website that you want to block. Note: License is required. URL Content Filter, Benefits: Free, flexible for customize webpage. Note: Manual setting (e.g., one keyword for one website.) I. Via Web Content Filter 472 1.
3. Enable this profile in Firewall>>General Setup>>Default Rule. 4. Next time when someone accesses facebook via this router, the web page would be blocked and the following message would be displayed instead. II. Via URL Content Filter A. Block the web page containing the word of “Facebook” 1. Open Object Settings>>Keyword Object. Click an index number to open the setting page. 2. In the field of Contents, please type facebook. Configure the settings as the following figure.
474 3. Open CSM>>URL Content Filter Profile. Click an index number to open the setting page. 4. Configure the settings as the following figure. 5. When you finished the above steps, click OK. Then, open Firewall>>General Setup.
6. Click the Default Rule tab. Choose the profile just configured from the drop down list in the field of URL Content Filter. Now, users cannot open any web page with the word “facebook” inside. B. Disallow users to play games on Facebook 1. Open Object Settings>>Keyword Object. Click an index number to open the setting page. 2. In the field of Contents, please type apps.facebook. Configure the settings as the following figure.
476 3. Open CSM>>URL Content Filter Profile. Click an index number to open the setting page. 4. Configure the settings as the following figure. 5. When you finished the above steps, please open Firewall>>General Setup. 6. Click the Default Rule tab. Choose the profile just configured from the drop down list in the field of URL Content Filter. Now, users cannot open any web page with the word “facebook” inside.
Part VII Management There are several items offered for the Vigor router system setup: System Status, TR-069, Administrator Password, User Password, Login Page Greeting, Configuration Backup, Syslog /Mail Alert, Time and Date, Management, Reboot System, Firmware Upgrade and Activation. It is used to control the bandwith of data transmission through configuration of Sessions Limit, Bandwidth Limit, and Quality of Servie (QoS).
VII-1 System Maintenance For the system setup, there are several items that you have to know the way of configuration: System Status, TR-069, Administrator Password, User Password, Login Page Greeting, Configuration Backup, Syslog /Mail Alert, Time and Date, Management, Reboot System, Firmware Upgrade, Activation, Internal Service User List and Dashboard Control. Below shows the menu items for System Maintenance.
Web User Interface VII-1-1 System Status The System Status provides basic network settings of Vigor router. It includes LAN and WAN interface information. Also, you could get the current running firmware version or firmware related information from this presentation. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Model Name Display the model name of the router. Firmware Version Display the firmware version of the router.
interface DNS - Display the assigned IP address of the primary DNS. 480 WAN Link Status - Display current connection status. MAC Address - Display the MAC address of the WAN Interface. Connection - Display the connection type. IP Address - Display the IP address of the WAN interface. Default Gateway - Display the assigned IP address of the default gateway. IPv6 Address - Display the IPv6 address for LAN. Scope - Display the scope of IPv6 address.
VII-1-2 TR-069 This device supports TR-069 standard. It is very convenient for an administrator to manage a TR-069 device through an Auto Configuration Server, e.g., VigorACS. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Tr069 Click Enable to activate the settings on this page. ACS Server On Choose the interface for the router connecting to ACS server.
482 ACS Server URL – Such data must be typed according to the ACS (Auto Configuration Server) you want to link. Wizard – Click it to enter the IP address of VigorACS server, port number and the handler. Acquire URL form DHCP option 43 – Check the box to get the URL from DHCP option 43. Username/Password – Such data must be typed according to the ACS (Auto Configuration Server) you want to link.
port, minimum keep alive period and maxmum keep alive period respectively. Bandwidth Utilisation Notification Settings To administrator, this feature is useful to monitor the bandwidth utilization of CPE(s). When the bandwidth used is over the threshold level (percentage defined in medium and high fields), a notification will be sent to VigorACS. After a long time observation, the administrator can determine if it is necessary to increase the bandwidth setting for that CPE or not.
VII-1-3 Administrator Password This page allows you to set new password. Available settings are explained as follows: 484 Item Description Administrator Password The administrator can login web user interface of Vigor router to modify all of the settings to fit the requirements. Old Password - Type in the old password. The factory default setting for password is “admin”. New Password – Define the basic password. The length of the password is limited to 23 characters.
confirmation. Enable ‘admin’ account login to Web UI from the Internet – It is configurable only when Administrator Local User is enabled. The default setting is enabled. It can ensure that any user is able to successfully accesses into web user interface of Vigor router through Internet by username/password of “admin/admin”. However, if you want to prevent the admin account from password attacks by hackers, disable this function and let local user account access into the WUI instead.
Administrator LDAP Setting selected SMS profile and Mail profile. Add – After typing the user name and password above, simply click it to create a new local user. The new one will be shown on the Local User List immediately. Edit – If the username listed on the box above is not satisfied, simply click the username and modify it on the field of User Name. Later, click Edit to update the information.
administrator password. Password Type in new password in this field. The length of the password is limited to 31 characters. Confirm Password Type in the new password again. Password Strength Display the security strength of the password specified above. Set to Factory Default Click to return to the factory default setting. When you click OK, the login window will appear. Please use the new password to access into the web user interface again.
6. The main screen with User Mode will be shown as follows. Settings to be configured in User Mode will be less than settings in Admin Mode. Only basic configuration settings will be available in User Mode. Info 488 Setting in User Mode can be configured as same as in Admin Mode.
VII-1-5 Login Page Greeting When you want to access into the web user interface of Vigor router, the system will ask you to offer username and password first. At that moment, the background of the web page is blank and no heading will be displayed on the Login window. This page allows you to specify login URL and the heading on the Login window if you have such requirement. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Check this box to enable the login customization function.
Below shows an example of login customization with the information typed in Login Description and Bulletin.
VII-1-6 Configuration Backup Such function can be used to apply the router settings configured by Vigor2820/ Vigor2830/ Vigor2850 to Vigor2862. Backup the Configuration Follow the steps below to backup your configuration. 1. Go to System Maintenance >> Configuration Backup. The following page will be popped-up, as shown below.
Restore - Click Restore to restore the configuration. If the file is encrypted, the system will ask you to type the password to decrypt the configuration file. Backup Click it to perform the configuration backup of this router. Protect with password- For the sake of security, the configuration file for the router can be encrypted. 492 Password – Type several characters as the password for encrypting the configuration file. Confirm Password – Type the password again for confirmation.
4. Click Save button, the configuration will download automatically to your computer as a file named config.cfg. The above example is using Windows platform for demonstrating examples. The Mac or Linux platform will appear different windows, but the backup function is still available. Info Backup for Certification must be done independently. The Configuration Backup does not include information of Certificate. Restore Configuration 1. Go to System Maintenance >> Configuration Backup.
494 2. Click Choose File button to choose the correct configuration file for uploading to the router. 3. Click Restore button and wait for few seconds, the following picture will tell you that the restoration procedure is successful.
VII-1-7 Syslog/Mail Alert SysLog function is provided for users to monitor router. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description SysLog Access Setup Enable - Check Enable to activate function of syslog. Syslog Save to – Check Syslog Server to save the log to Syslog server. Check USB Disk to save the log to the attached USB storage disk. Router Name Display the name for such router configured in System Maintenance>>Management.
address is available or not. SMTP Server/SMTP Port - The IP address/Port number of the SMTP server. Mail To - Assign a mail address for sending mails out. Return-Path - Assign a path for receiving the mail from outside. Use SSL - Check this box to use port 465 for SMTP server for some e-mail server uses https as the transmission method. Authentication - Check this box to activate this function while using e-mail application. User Name - Type the user name for authentication.
VII-1-8 Time and Date It allows you to specify where the time of the router should be inquired from. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Current System Time Click Inquire Time to get the current time. Use Browser Time Select this option to use the browser time from the remote administrator PC host as router’s system time. Use Internet Time Select to inquire time information from Time Server on the Internet using assigned protocol.
Interval Send NTP Request Through Specify a WAN interface to send NTP request for time synchronization. Click OK to save these settings. VII-1-9 SNMP This page allows you to configure settings for SNMP and SNMPV3 services. The SNMPv3 is more secure than SNMP through the encryption method (support AES and DES) and authentication method (support MD5 and SHA) for the management needs. Available settings are explained as follows: 498 Item Description Enable SNMP Agent Check it to enable this function.
agent/SNMPV2C agent. Get Community Set the name for getting community by typing a proper character. The default setting is public. The maximum length of the text is limited to 23 characters. Set Community Set community by typing a proper name. The default setting is private. The maximum length of the text is limited to 23 characters. Manager Host IP (IPv4) Set one host as the manager to execute SNMP function. Please type in IPv4 address to specify certain host.
VII-1-10 Management This page allows you to manage the settings for Internet/LAN Access Control, Access List from Internet, Management Port Setup, TLS/SSL Encryption Setup, CVM Access Control and Device Management. The management pages for IPv4 and IPv6 protocols are different. For IPv4 Available settings are explained as follows: 500 Item Description Router Name Type in the router name provided by ISP.
The web user interface will be open until you click the Logout icon manually. Enable Validation Code in Internet/LAN Access If it is enabled, the mechanism of validation code will be offered by Vigor router. That is, the client must type validation code while accessing into Internet or web user interface of Vigor router. Internet Access Control Allow management from the Internet - Enable the checkbox to allow system administrators to login from the Internet.
function of SSL 3.0/1.0/1.1/1.2 if required. Due to security consideration, the built-in HTTPS and SSL VPN server of the router had upgraded to TLS1.x protocol. If you are using old browser(eg. IE6.0) or old SmartVPN Client, you may still need to enable SSL 3.0 to make sure you can connect, however, it's not recommended. CVM Access Control CVM Port – Check the box to enable such port setting. CVM SSL Port – Check the box to enable such port setting.
Control to allow system administrators to login from the Internet. There are several servers provided by the system to allow you managing the router from Internet. Check the box(es) to specify. Disable PING from the Internet - Check the checkbox to disable all PING packets from the Internet. For security issue, this function is enabled by default. Access List from the Inernet You could specify that the system administrator can only login from a specific host or network defined in the list.
VII-1-11 Panel Control The behavior of the LEDs, buttons, USB ports and LAN ports on the front panel of the Vigor router can be customized as desired. For LED By default, the LEDs are enabled, and will illuminate or blink continuously to show the status of the various functions in the router. However, they can be configured to remain off at all times, or remain off until a button is pressed to wake them up.
Status Shows the status of the LEDs: – LEDs are in sleep mode. To wake them up, do one of the following: press the Wake up LED button on this page press the Wireless On/Off/WPS button on the front panel press the Factory Reset button on the front panel. – LEDs are awake. To put them to sleep immediately press the LED sleep immediately button on this page press the Factory Reset button on the front panel for 1 second. After finished the above settings, click OK to save the configuration.
button. Disabling the Factory Reset button only prevents it from being used to reboot Vigor router with default settings. It can still be used to wake up the LEDs when LED sleep mode is enabled. Enable Wireless Button The default value is Enabled. Deselect to disable the ability of the Wireless button to control WLAN and WPS functions. Disabling the wireless button only prevents it from being used to control WLAN functions. It can still be used to wake up the LEDs when LED sleep mode is enabled.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Refresh Click to refresh the page to display the latest information. Port The number corresponds to the LAN port number shown on the front panel. Enable Deselect to disable the LAN port. The default value is enabled. Status Shows the status of the USB port. Link Up – An active Ethernet device is connected to the port. Link Down – No active Ethernet device is detected. --- – The LAN port is disabled.
VII-1-12 Self-Signed Certificate A self-signed certificate is a unique identification for the device (e.g., Vigor router) which generates the certificate by itself to ensure the router security. Such self-signed certificate is signed with its own private key. The self-signed certificate will be applied in SSL VPN, HTTPS, and so on. In addition, it can be created for free by using a wide variety of tools. Click Regeneration to open Regenerate Self-Signed Certificate window.
Vigor2862 Series User’s Guide 509
VII-1-13 Reboot System The Web user interface may be used to restart your router. Click Reboot System from System Maintenance to open the following page. Index (1-15) in Schedule Setup - You can type in four sets of time schedule for performing system reboot. All the schedules can be set previously in Applications >> Schedule web page and you can use the number that you have set in that web page.
VII-1-14 Firmware Upgrade Click System Maintenance>> Firmware Upgrade to proceed to firmware upgrade. Click the button of Check The Latest Firmware to open a pop up window displaying the newest firmware version released for such Vigor router. Choose the one you need and click Download. After that, click Select to specify the one you just download. Then, click Upgrade. The system will upgrade the firmware of the router automatically.
VII-1-15 Firmware Backup The firmware for Vigor router can be saved on the host as a backup firmware. After that, if the router crashes due to the firmware error, the backup firmware will be applied to make the router run normally. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Backup Setting Backup after reboot - Current firmware will be backup after rebooting Vigor router. Backup after system running - Perform the firmware backup after a period of time.
V II- 1 - 1 7 A c tiv a tio n There are three ways to activate WCF on vigor router, using Service Activation Wizard, by means of CSM>>Web Content Filter Profile or via System Maintenance>>Activation. After you have finished the setting profiles for WCF (refer to Web Content Filter Profile), it is the time to activate the mechanism for your computer. Click System Maintenance>>Activation to open the following page for accessing http://myvigor.draytek.com.
514 Vigor2862 Series User’s Guide
VII-1-18 Internal Service User List User profiles (clients) defined and enabled in User Management>>User Profile will be displayed in this page. Such page allows you to turn on or turn off security authentication service (offered by inernal RADIUS and/or Local 802.1X) for each user profile without accessing into the User Management configuration page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description User Name Display the name of the existed user profile.
VII-1-19 Dashboard Control There are nine groups of setting information which can be displayed on Dashboard as a reference for administrator/user. Except for Front Panel and System Information, the settings information regarding to the groups listed on this page can be hidden if required.
VII-2 Bandwidth Management Sessions Limit A PC with private IP address can access to the Internet via NAT router. The router will generate the records of NAT sessions for such connection. The P2P (Peer to Peer) applications (e.g., BitTorrent) always need many sessions for procession and also they will occupy over resources which might result in important accesses impacted. To solve the problem, you can use limit session to limit the session procession for specified Hosts.
Vigor routers as edge routers of DS domain shall check the marked DSCP value in the IP header of bypassing traffic, to allocate certain amount of resource execute appropriate policing, classification or scheduling. The core routers in the backbone will do the same checking before executing treatments in order to ensure service-level consistency throughout the whole QoS-enabled network.
Web User Interface Below shows the menu items for Bandwidth Management. VII-2-1 Sessions Limit In the Bandwidth Management menu, click Sessions Limit to open the web page. To activate the function of limit session, simply click Enable and set the default session limit. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Session Limit Enable - Click this button to activate the function of limit session. Disable - Click this button to close the function of limit session.
number used for each computer in LAN. Limitation List Displays a list of specific limitations that you set on this web page. Specific Limitation Start IP- Defines the start IP address for limit session. End IP - Defines the end IP address for limit session. Maximum Sessions - Defines the available session number for each host in the specific range of IP addresses.
VII-2-2 Bandwidth Limit In the Bandwidth Management menu, click Bandwidth Limit to open the web page. To activate the function of limit bandwidth, simply click Enable and set the default upstream and downstream limit. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable / Disable Enable - Click this button to activate the function of limit bandwidth. Disable - Click this button to close the function of limit bandwidth.
bandwidth. End IP - Define the end IP address for limit bandwidth. Object – All the IPs specified by the selected IP object or IP group will be restricted by bandwith limit defined by TX Limit and RX Limit below. IP Group – Specify an IP group by using the drop down list. IP Object - Specify an IP object by using the drop down list.
VII-2-3 Quality of Service In the Bandwidth Management menu, click Quality of Service to open the web page. You can configure general setup for the WAN/LTE interface, edit the Class Rule, and edit the Service Type for the Class Rule for your request. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description General Setup Index – Display the WAN/LTE interface number link that you can edit. Enable – Check the box to enable the QoS function for WAN/LTE interface.
Item Description Class Rule Index – Display the class number that you can edit. Name – Display the name of the class. Rule – Allow to configure detailed settings for the selected Class. Service Type – Allow to configure detailed settings for the service type. Enable the First Priority for VoIP SIP/RTP When this feature is enabled, the VoIP SIP/UDP packets will be sent with highest priority. SIP UDP Port – Set a port number used for SIP.
General Setup for WAN Interface Click WAN/LTE interface number link to configure the limited bandwidth ratio for QoS of the WAN interface. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable UDP Bandwidth Control Set the limited bandwidth ratio. This is a protection of TCP application traffic since UDP application traffic such as streaming video will exhaust lots of bandwidth. Limited_bandwidth Ratio - The ratio typed here is reserved for limited bandwidth of UDP application.
2. After you click the Edit link, you will see the following page. Now you can define the name for that Class. In this case, “Test” is used as the name of Class Index #1. 3. For adding a new rule, click Add to open the following page. Available settings are explained as follows: 526 Item Description ACT Check this box to invoke these settings.
Hardware Acceleration Check this box to enable the hardware acceleration when such rule is applied. Ethernet Type Please specify which protocol (IPv4 or IPv6) will be used for this rule. Local Address Click the Edit button to set the local IP address (on LAN) for the rule. Remote Address Click the Edit button to set the remote IP address (on LAN/WAN) for the rule. Address Type – Determine the address type for the source address. For Single Address, you have to fill in Start IP address.
Edit the Service Type for Class Rule 1. To add a new service type, edit or delete an existed service type, please click the Edit link under Service Type field. 2. After you click the Edit link, you will see the following page. 3. For adding a new service type, click Add to open the following page. Available settings are explained as follows: 528 Item Description Service Name Type in a new service for your request. The maximum length of the name you can set is 11 characters.
Port Configuration 5. Type - Click Single or Range as the Type. If you select Range, you have to type in the starting port number and the end porting number on the boxes below. Port Number – Type in the starting port number and the end porting number here if you choose Range as the type. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration. By the way, you can set up to 10 service types.
VII-2-4 APP QoS The QoS function is used to do bandwidth management for the services with certain IP or port number. However, there is no effect of bandwidth management on the service such as VNC or PPTV without fixed IP or port number. APP QoS employs the function of APP Enforcement to detect the types of software in application layer.
Each tab offers different types of protocols to fit your request. Select All Click it to select all of the protocols. Clear All Click it to de-select all of the protocols. Apply to all Choose one of the actions from the drop down list. It is prepared for applying to all protocols. Apply – Click it to make the selected action be applied all of the selected protocols immediately. Action Vigor2862 Series User’s Guide There are many protocols which can be specified with different QoS Class.
Application Notes A-1 How to Optimize the Bandwidth through QoS Technology Have you ever gotten any problems in uploading/downloading files (Voice, video or email/data only) with the narrow/districted bandwidth you may share from the common Internet connection line? The advanced bandwidth management technology-QoS (Quality of Service) helps you to well allocate the bandwidth upon your demand of Voice, Video, or Data transferring.
3. In the following page, type a name (e.g., VoIP) for such class and click Add. 4. Check the box of ACT. Click Edit to specify the local address. 5. In the pop-up window, choose Range Address as the Address Type and type the start IP address and end IP address in relational fields. Click OK to save the settings and exit the window.
6. Click OK again to save the settings. 7. The class rule for VoIP has been set. Click OK to return to previous page. 8. Do the same steps to add class rules for IPTV and Data/Email with IP addresses as shown below.
9. Assuming you get 2MB/512Kb Internet line. You can check Enable of WAN1 to set up the bandwidth for different groups among VoIP, IPTV and Data/Email. 10. Enter 30, 50 and 15 in the boxes for VoIP, IPTV and Data/Email respectively.
11. Click the WAN1 link and check the box of Enable UDP Bandwidth Control. 12. Click OK to save the settings. The class rules for WAN1 are defined as shown below.
VII-3 User Management User Management is a security feature which disallows any IP traffic (except DHCP-related packets) from a particular host until that host has correctly supplied a valid username and password. Instead of managing with IP address/MAC address, User Management function manages hosts with user account. Network administrator can give different firewall policies or rules for different hosts with different User Management accounts. This is more flexible and convenient for network management.
Web User Interface VII-3-1 General Setup General Setup can determine the standard (rule-based or user-based) for the users controlled by User Management. The mode (standard) selected here will influence the contents of the filter rule(s) applied to every user. Available settings are explained as follows: 538 Item Description Mode There are two modes offered here for you to choose. Each mode will bring different filtering effect to the users involved.
Filter Rule to the users. Authentication page Web Authentication - Choose the protocol for web authentication. Login Page Logo – A logo which can be used as an identification of enterprise can be uploaded and displayed on the login page. You can use the default one, blank page or upload other image files (the size no mare than 524 × 352 pixel) to have an image of enterprise or have the effect of advertisement. Login Page Greeting - Such link allows you to access into the setting page for login greeting.
VII-3-2 User Profile This page allows you to set customized profiles (up to 200) which will be applied for users controlled under User Management. Simply open User Management>>User Profile. To set the user profile, please click any index number link to open the following page. Notice that profile 1 (admin) and profile 2 (Dial-In User) are factory default settings. Profile 2 is reserved for future use.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Common Settings Enable this account Check this box to enable such user profile. User Name Type a name for such user profile (e.g., LAN_User_Group_1, WLAN_User_Group_A, WLAN_User_Group_B, etc). When a user tries to access Internet through this router, an authentication step must be performed first. The user has to type the User Name specified here to pass the authentication.
characters. Confirm Password Type the password again for confirmation. Web Login Setting Idle Timeout If the user is idle over the limitation of the timer, the network connection will be stopped for such user. By default, the Idle Timeout is set to 10 minutes. Max User Login Such profile can be used by many users. You can set the limitation for the number of users accessing Internet with the conditions of such profile. The default setting is 0 which means no limitation in the number of users.
Pop Browser Tracking Window If such function is enabled, a pop up window will be displayed on the screen with time remaining for connection if Idle Timeout is set. However, the system will update the time periodically to keep the connection always on. Thus, Idle Timeout will not interrupt the network connection. Authentication Any user (from LAN side or WLAN side) tries to connect to Internet via Vigor router must be authenticated by the router first.
time remained when a user accesses into Internet through Vigor router successfully. When the time is up, all the connection jobs including network, IM, social media, facebook, and etc. will be terminated. Enable Data Quota Data Quota means the total amount for data transmission allowed for the user. The unit is MB/GB. – Click this box to set and increase the data quota for such profile. – Click this box to decrease the data quota for such profile.
VII-3-3 User Group This page allows you to bind several user profiles into one group. These groups will be used in Firewall>>General Setup as part of filter rules. Please click any index number link to open the following page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Name Type a name for this user group. Available User Objects You can gather user profiles (objects) from User Profile page within one user group.
Selected Keyword Objects Click box. button to add the selected user objects in this After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration. VII-3-4 User Online Status This page displays the user(s) connected to the router and refreshes the connection status in an interval of several seconds.
Data Quota Display the quota for data transmission. Idle Time Display the idle timeout setting for such profile. Action Block - can avoid specified user accessing into Internet. Unblock – allow the user to access into Internet. Logout – the user will be logged out forcefully.
Application Notes A-1 How to authenticate clients via User Management Before using the function of User Management, please make sure User-Based has been selected as the Mode in the User Management>>General Setup page. With User Management authentication function, before a valid username and password have been correctly supplied, a particular client will not be allowed to access Internet through the router. There are three ways for authentication: Web, Telnet and Alert Tool.
router. Since this is an SSL connection, some web browsers will display warning messages. With Microsoft Internet Explorer, you may get the following warning message. Please press Continue to this website (not recommended). With Mozilla Firefox, you may get the following warning message. Select I Understand the Risks.
With Chrome browser, you may get the following warning. Click Proceed anyway. After that, the web authentication window will appear. Input the user name and the password for your account (defined in User Management) and click Login. If the authentication is successful, the client will be redirected to the original web site that he tried to access. In this example, it is http://www.draytek.com . Furthermore, you will get a popped up window as the following. Then you can access the Internet.
Note, if you block the web browser to pop up any window, you will not see such window. If the authentication is failed, you will get the error message, The username or password you entered is incorrect. Please login again. In above description, you access an external web site to trigger the authentication. You may also directly access the router’s Web UI for authentication. Both HTTP and HTTPS are supported, for example http://192.168.1.1 or https://192.168.1.1 . Replace 192.168.1.
With the default setup
, you will be redirected to http://www.draytek.com . You may change it if you want. For example, you will get the following welcome message if you enter Login Successful in the Welcome Message table. Also you will get a Tracking Window if you don’t block the pop-up window.VPN Remote Dial-in User profiles can be extended to the User profiles in User Management for authentication. There are two different behaviors when a User Management account and a VPN profile share the same Username: If SSL Tunnel or SSL Web Proxy is enabled in the VPN profile, the user profile in User Management will always be invalid for Web authentication.
Authentication via Telnet The LAN clients can also authenticate their accounts via telnet. 1. Telnet to the router’s LAN IP address and input the account name for the authentication: 2. Type the password for authentication and press Enter. The message User login successful will be displayed with the expired time (if configured). Info 3. 554 Here expired time is “Unlimited” means the Time Quota function is not enabled for this account. After login, this account will not be expired until it is logout.
4. If the Time Quota is set with “0” minute, you will get the following message which means this account has no time quota. If the Time Quota is enabled and time is not 0 minute, You will get the following message. The expired time is shown after you login. After you run out the available time, you can’t use this account any more until the administrator manually adds additional time for you.
Authentication via VigorPro Alert Notice Tool Authentication via Web or Telnet is convenient for users; however, it has some limitations. The most advantage with VigorPro Alert Notice Tool to operate the authentication is the ability to do auto login. If the timeout value set on the router for the user account has been reached, the router will stop the client computer from accessing the Internet until it does an authentication again.
A-2 How to use Landing Page Feature Landing Page is a special feature configured under User Management. It can specify the message, content to be seen or specify which website to be accessed into when users try to access into the Internet by passing the authentication. Here, we take Vigor2862 series router as an example. Example 1：Users can see the message for landing page after logging into Internet successfully 1. Open the web user interface of Vigor2862. 2.
558 4. In the following page, check the box of Landing page and click OK to save the settings. 5. Open any browser (e.g., FireFox, Internet Explorer). The logging page will appear and asks for username and password. Please type the correct username and password. 6. Click Login. If the logging is successful, you will see the message of Login Success from the browser you use.
Example 2：The system will connect to http://www.draytek.com automatically after logging into Internet successfully 1. In the field of Landing Page, please type the words as below: “
” 2. Next, enable the Landing Page function. Open User Management -> User Profile and click one of the index number (e.g., index number 3) links. 3.560 4. Open any browser (e.g., FireFox, Internet Explorer). The logging page will appear and asks for username and password. Please type the correct username and password. 5. Click Login. If the logging is successful, you will be directed into the website of www.draytek.com.
VII-4 Hotspot Web Portal The Hotspot Web Portal feature allows you to set up profiles so that LAN users could either be redirected to specific URLs, or be shown messages when they first connect to the Internet through the router. Users could be required to read and agree to terms and conditions, or authenticate themselves, prior to gaining access to the Internet. Other potential uses include the serving of advertisements and promotional materials, and broadcast of public service announcements.
Applied Interface Shows the interfaces to which this profile applies. Preview Click this button to preview the Hotspot Web Portal page that will be displayed to users. VII-4-1-1 Login Modes There are five login modes to choose from for authenticating network clients: Skip Login, Click Through, Social Login, PIN Login, and Social or PIN Login. Each login mode will present a different web page to users when they connect to the network. Skip Login This mode does not perform any authentication.
PIN Code Login When users attempt to connect to the Internet for the first time, they will be prompted to enter a mobile number to receive a PIN by SMS. After they have authenticated themselves by entering the PIN, they will be redirected to the landing page, indicating that they have been granted Internet access. Social or PIN Login This login mode presents both Social Login and PIN Code Login modes to the users, and allows them to select their preferred mode of authentication.
VII-4-1-2 Steps for Configuring a Web Portal Profile 1. Login Method Click the index link (e.g., #1) of the selected profile to display the following page. Available settings are explained as follows: 564 Item Description Enable this profile Check to enable this profile. Comments Enter a brief description to identify this profile. Choose Login Select the desired Login Mode.
Method Save and Next Click to save the configuration on this page and proceed to the next page. Cancel Click to save the configuration on this page and proceed to the next page. If you have chosen Skip Login as the Login Mode, skip to step 4 Whitelisting below. Otherwise, proceed to configure the login page by following steps 2 and 3. 2. Background If you have selected a Login Mode that requires authentication, select a background for the login page.
Available settings are explained as follows: 566 Item Description Choose Login Select either Color Background or Image Background as the login Vigor2862 Series User’s Guide
Background page background scheme. Login Page URL Enter the URL for the login page. Browser Tab Title Enter the text to be shown as the webpage title in the browser. Logo Image The DrayTek Logo will be displayed by default. However, you can enter HTML text or upload an image to replace the default logo. Logo Background Color Select the background color of the logo from the predefined color list, or select Customize Color and enter the RGB values. Click Preview to preview the selected color.
Available settings are explained as follows: 568 Item Description Welcome Message Enter the text to be displayed as the welcome message. Terms and Conditions Description Enter the text to be displayed as the Terms and Conditions hyperlink text. Terms and Conditions Content Enter the text to be displayed in the Terms and Conditions pop-up window.
Social Login and PIN Login This section describes the Login Page setup step if you have selected PIN Login and/or Social Login as the Login Mode. You will see only settings that are relevant to the selected login mode(s). Settings that are common to Facebook, Google and PIN authentication are: Item Description Welcome Message Enter the text to be displayed as the welcome message. Terms and Conditions Description Enter the text to be displayed as the Terms and Conditions hyperlink text.
If you have selected Facebook login, these settings will appear: Item Description Facebook Login Description Enter the text to be displayed on the Facebook login button. Facebook APP ID Enter a valid Facebook developer app ID. If you do not already have an app ID, refer to section A-1 How to create a Facebook App ID for Web Portal Authentication for instructions on obtaining an APP ID. Facebook APP Secret Enter the secret configured for the APP ID entered above.
Item Description Hint Message Enter the text used to suggest users to choose SMS authentication. Receiving PIN via SMS Description Enter the text to be displayed on the button that the user clicks to receive an SMS PIN. Receiving PIN via SMS Content Enter the message to be sent by SMS to inform the user of the PIN. The PIN variable is specified by within the message.
Item Description Save and Next Click to save the configuration on this page and proceed to the next page. Cancel Click to abort the configuration process and return to the profile summary page. 2nd-stage Page for PIN Login If you have selected PIN Login as the login mode, you will also need to configure the page that is displayed to users when they request a PIN.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Back Button Description Enter text for the label of the hyperlink to return to the previous page. PIN Code Message Enter text to be displayed as the body text on the page. Default Country Code Select the default country code to be displayed using the dropdown menu.
Enter Mobile Number Description Enter message to be displayed in the mobile number textbox to prompt the user to enter the mobile number. Send Button Description Enter the label text of the send button. Send Button Color Select the color of the send button from the predefined color list, or select Customize Color and enter the RGB value. Click Preview to preview the selected color. Send Succeeded Message Enter text to be displayed to notify the user after the PIN has been sent.
Save and Next Click to save the configuration on this page and proceed to the next page. Cancel Click to abort the configuration process and return to the profile summary page. 5. More Options In this step you can configure advanced options for the Hotspot Web Portal.
Available settings are explained as follows: 576 Item Description Expired Time After Activation Enter the time duration that users are allowed to have Internet access after logging in. HTTPS Redirection If this option is selected, unauthenticated clients accessing HTTPS websites will be redirected to the login page, but the browser may alert the user of certificate errors. If this option is not selected, attempts to access to HTTPS website will time out without redirection.
VII-4-2 Users Information The log information for users accessing into Internat through web portal will be shown on this page. Click a user link can open another web page displaying more detailed information. VII-4-2-1 User Info The page can display user information based on the filtering conditions (profile or login method).
Basic information for the device will be shown on the field of Login Info; online/offline status for the device can be send on the field of Devices; and historical information for device login will be shown on the field of Login History. In addition, to forcefully log out a selected device, simply check the one you want to logout and click the Log Out Device button.
VII-4-2-2 Database Setup This page allows the user to configure settings for database on USB disk. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable database to record user information Check the box to record user information on router’s database. Before checking this box, insert a USB disk with adequate storage space, first. File Path If a USB disk has been inserted into the USB port of Vigor router, the file path will be shown in this area.
Application Notes A-1 How to create Facebook APP for Web Portal Authentication? The new web portal feature support social login as authentication method, and allows network administrator to authenticate LAN clients by their Google or Facebook account. This document introduces how to create Facebook APP, and generate the APP ID and APP secret that can be used in Web Portal setup. 1. Register as FB Developer: Go to https://developers.facebook.com/ and login the FB account. 2.
6. Add a New App. Click on My Apps > Add a New App. Choose Website platform. 7. Click Skip and Create App ID on first use. Type Display Name. Choose Category. Click Create App ID.
8. Pops up security check window, select the answer, and then click Submit to finish the process.
9. On Dashboard, user can get App ID and App Secret, these information will be used in Vigor Router's Web Portal Setup. 10. Add Platform on My Apps. Go to Settings then click Add Platform. 11. Choose Website in Select Platform window. 12. Enter the Site URL as http://portal.draytek.com. (Note: If you change http port in the vigor, please add http port in URLs. For example, we use 8080 as http port and we'll put http://portal.draytek.com:8080). Enter the Contact Email. And click Save Change.
13. Set up Client OAuth. Go to Settings >> Advanced >>Client OAuth Settings, enter "http://portal.draytek.com" in Valid OAuth redirect URIs, and save changes. 14. Go to My Apps>>Status & Review, and switch available status to YES to activate the APP.
Vigor2862 Series User’s Guide 585
A-2 How to create Google APP for Web Portal Authentication? The new web portal feature support social login as authentication method, and allows network administrator to authenticate LAN clients by their Google or Facebook account. This document introduces how to create Facebook APP, and generate the APP ID and APP secret that can be used in Web Portal setup. 1. Create Developer project. Go to https://code.google.com/apis/console, login with a Google account then click Create project.
4. Create Client ID. Click Credentials and Click Add credentials > OAuth2.0 client ID. 5. Choose Web application as Application Type, then enter name. Set Authorized JavaScript origins and Authorized redirect URLs as http://portal.draytek.com, and click Create. (Note: If you change http port in the vigor, please add http port in URLs. For example, we use 8080 as http port and we'll put http://portal.draytek.com:8080). 6. Get client ID and client secret.
VII-5 Central Management (VPN) Vigor2862 can build virtual private network (VPN) between itself and any other TR-069 CPE by the function of central VPN management. In addition, it can be treated as a server (called CVM server) which can manage TR-069 CPE for periodical firmware upgrade, configuration backup and restoring configuration.
Web User Interface Central VPN Management menu can manage the CPE connected through WAN only. VII-5-1 General Setup This page is used to configure settings which will be used by the clients to register to such Vigor router. Click General Settings and IPsec VPN Settings to configure the basic settings for CVM mechanism. VII-5-1-1 General Settings To enable the CVM feature, the first thing you have to do is enabling CVM port or CVM SSL Port.
Username Type a username which will be used by any CPE trying to connect to Vigor router. Password Type the password for the user. Polling Interval Type the time value (unit is second). The range is from 60 ~ 86400. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration. VII-5-1-2 IPsec VPN Settings Central VPN management is operated through IPsec VPN connection.
VII-5-2 CPE Management All the CPEs managed by Vigor2862 series can be seen with icons from this page. Before using such feature, make sure the CVM port has been enabled and configured properly. VII-5-2-1 Managed Device List This page allows you to manage the CPEs connected to Vigor2862 series.
Page with CPE connected Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Managed Devices List This area displays device icons (up to 8) for the CPE managed by Vigor2862 series. Edit – To modify the name and location of specific CPE, click the one you want and click the Edit button. A pop up window will appear. Simply change the name and/or location manually. Delete – To disconnect the management of any CPE, click the CPE icon you want and click the Delete button.
Unmanaged Devices List Any device (CPE) which follows the standard of TR-069 can be configured and can be detected by Vigor2862 series automatically. Only eight remote devices can be managed by Vigor2862 at one time. Therefore, other remote devices detected by Vigor2862 series might not be displayed in such field. Add – Move the selected device from Unmanaged Devices List to Managed Devices List. IP Address – Display the IP address of the remote device.
VII-5-2-2 CPE Maintenance This area displays all the profiles which are created for applying to the managed device. This page can help the administrator to do maintenance jobs like firmware upgrade, configuration backup, configuration restoration and etc. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Refresh Click it to refresh current page. USB Disk Vigor2862. Vigor2862.
Profile Name Display the name of the maintenance profile. Device Name Display the name of the managed CPE that the maintenance profile will apply to. Action Display the action that managed CPE shall accept. Schedule Display the schedule profiles selected for such profile. Now The action will be performed for the selected CPE immediately. How to add a new Maintenance Profile Follow the steps below to create a new maintenance profile. 1. Click any index number link, e.g., Index 1. 2.
Router Model Action Type There are three actions for you to choose for such profile. Config Backup – It means such profile will be used for configuration backup of the selected CPE. Config Restore – It means such profile will be used for restoring the configuration of the selected CPE. Info When restoring configuration to a CPE, make sure the configuration file you selected was backup from this CPE before. Because restoring from another device's configuration file may cause serious problem (e.g.
Vigor2862 Series User’s Guide 597
VII-5-3 VPN Management An easy and quick method is offered to configure VPN settings for building VPN connection automatically between Vigor2862 series (treated as VPN server) and other Vigor router (treated as CPE device, i.e., VPN client). Available parameters are listed as follows: Item Description CPE VPN Connection List 598 VPN Display the name of the LAN-to-LAN profile.
Once the device is managed (controlled) by Vigor2862 series, it will be displayed on such screen automatically. If not, refer to sections “How to manage the CPE (router) through Vigor2862?” for more detailed information. VII-5-4 Log & Alert This page offers brief information to identify the CPE connected to Vigor2862 series. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Display Mode Choose the mode you want to display the related information on the following table.
Application Notes A-1 CVM Application - How to manage the CPE (router) through Vigor2862 series? To manage CPEs through Vigor2862 series, you have to set URL on CPE first and set username and password for Vigor2862 series. For this section, we use Vigor2850 series as the example. All the CPE configuration will be done through Vigor2850 series. Configure CVM Settings on Vigor2862 series 600 1. Access into the web user interface of Vigor2862 series. 2. Open Central Management>> VPN >>General Setup. 3.
Configure Settings on CPE 1. In the end of the CPE, access into the web user interface of the CPE (e.g., Vigor2850 series). Open a web browser (for example, IE, Mozilla Firefox or Netscape) and type http://192.168.1.1. 2. Open System Maintenance >> TR-069. 3. In the field of ACS Server, type the URL (IP address with port number) of Vigor2862 series and type the same Username and Password defined on the page of Central VPN Management>>General Setup in Vigor2862 series.
602 5. Check Allow management from the Internet to set management access control and click OK. 6. Open WAN>>Internet Access. Use the drop down list of Access Mode on WAN1 to select MPoA (RFC1483/2684). Then, click Details Page. 7. Click Specify an IP address. Type correct WAN IP address, subnet mask and gateway IP address for your CPE. Then click OK.
Info Reboot the CPE device and re-log into Vigor2862 series. CPE which has registered to Vigor2862 series will be captured and displayed on the page of Central VPN Management>>CPE Management. Check CPE Maintenance Page 1. Return to the web user interface of Vigor2862 series. 2. Open Central VPN Management>>VPN Management. Now there is one CPE displayed on the field of Unmanaged Devices List. 3. Choose the one (Vigor2850) from Unmanaged Devices List and click Add.
A-2 CVM Application - How to build the VPN between remote devices and Vigor2862 series? When a remote device is managed by Vigor2862 series, it is easy to build VPN between these two devices. 604 1. Access into the web user interface of Vigor2862 series. 2. Open Central Management>> VPN >>CPE Management. 3. Click the device icon (marked with 4. Wait for a moment. If VPN is built successfully, related information will be displayed on CPE VPN Connection List. ) and click the PPTP/IPsec button.
5. A LAN to LAN profile for such VPN will be generated automatically. You can access into VPN and Remote Access>>LAN to LAN of the remote device for viewing the detailed information. Note: The profile name is created automatically by the system. Do not modify any value in such page to avoid VPN error.
A-3 CVM Application - How to upgrade CPE firmware through Vigor2862 series? Download the newest firmware from your Draytek website to USB Storage Disk for the device (e.g., Vigor2850) managed by Vigor2862 series. Vigor2850, as an example, is chosen for Vigor2862 to perform the CPE firmware upgrade remotely in this case. 606 1. Plug in USB storage disk onto Vigor2862 series via USB interface. Make sure the USB disk has been installed correctly, otherwise, the firmware upgrade will not be successful. 2.
4. The Maintenance profile dialog appears. In the field of Profile Name, type a name for such maintenance profile; check Enable; and choose the one you want to perform firmware upgrade from Device Name drop down list. From the Action Type, choose Firmware Upgrade. Type the file/path of the newest firmware or click Select to locate it. Specify the Schedule profile. At last, click OK. 5. Now, a new maintenance profile has been created. 6.
8. Then check the device information for the managed device if the firmware upgrade is successful or not. Click Managed Devices List. Click the icon of Vigor2850 and click Edit and view the software version. Another way to check if the firmware upgrade is completed or not, simply open Central VPN Management>>Log & Alert.
VII-6 Central Management (AP) Vigor2862 can manage the access points supporting AP management via Central AP Management. AP Map AP Map is helpful to determine the best location for VigorAP in a room. A floor plan of a room is required to be uploaded first.
Web User Interface VII-6-1 Dashboard This page shows VigorAP’s information about Status, Event Log, Total Traffic or Station Number by displaying VigorAP icon, text and histogram. Just move and click your mouse cursor on Status, Event Log, Total Traffic or Station Number. Corresponding web pages will be open immediately.
To access into the web user interface of VigorAP, simply move your mouse cursor on the VigorAP icon and click it. The system will guide you to access into the web user interface of VigorAP. VII-6-2 Status This page displays current status (online, offline or SSID hidden, IP address, encryption, channel, version, password and etc.) of the access points managed by Vigor router. Please open Central AP Management>>Function Support List to check what AP Models are supported.
VII-6-3 WLAN Profile WLAN profile is used to apply to a selected access point. It is very convenient for the administrator to configure the setting for access point without opening the web user interface of the access point. Click the number link of the selected profile to modify the content of the profile. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Profile There are five WLAN profiles offered to be configured. Simply click the index number link to open the modification page.
Simply choose the device you want from Existing Device field. Click >> to move the device to Selected Device field. Then, click OK. The selected WLAN profile will be applied to the selected access point immediately. Later the access point will reboot. To Local Vigor2862 Series User’s Guide WLAN Profile configured in this page is specified for VigorAP connected to Vigor router. If required, these settings also can be applied to Vigor router.
How to edit the wireless LAN profile? 1. Select the WLAN profile (index number 1 to 5) you want to edit. 2. Click the index number link to display the following page.
Info The function of Auto Provision is available for the default WLAN profile. 3. After finished the general settings configuration, click Next to open the following page for 2.4G wireless security settings.
4. After finished the above web page configuration, click Next to open the following page for 5G wireless security settings. 5. When you finished the above web page configuration, click Finish to exit and return to the first page. The modified WLAN profile will be shown on the web page.
VII-6-4 AP Maintenance Vigor router can execute configuration backup, configuration restoration, firmware upgrade and remote reboot for the APs managed by the router. It is very convenient for the administrator to process maintenance without accessing into the web user interface of the access point. Info Config Backup can be performed to one AP at one time. Others functions (e.g., Config Restore, Firmware Upgrade, Remote Reboot can be performed to more than one AP at one time by using Vigor2862.
Select Device Display all the available access points managed by Vigor router. Simply click << or >> to move the device(s) between Select Device and Selected Device areas. Selected Device Display the access points that will be applied by such function after clicking OK. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to perform the action. VII-6-5 AP Map This function is helpful to determine the best location for VigorAP in a room. A floor plan of a room is required to be uploaded first.
Creating /Editing the AP Map Profile 1. Select a number index and click Edit to open the following web page. Available settings are explained as follows: 2. Item Description Location (Profile Name) Type a name (e.g., 3F) for the AP map profile. Upload Map Click the Select button to choose an image file (only JPG and PNG are supported) for floor plan. Cancel Click it to cancel the configuration. Next Click it to go to the next configuration page. Click Next.
3. Follow the instruction listed on the web page to draw a red line for length / width. Then, type the value on the pop up dialog to determine the real distance. The values for length and width will be displayed on the web page. 4. 620 Click Next to open the web page of Planning. Available APs detected by Vigor router will be displayed on the upper end.
5. Select the AP you need; drag and drop an AP icon from upper end to the map on the bottom. 6. Check the box of Show AP Coverage and choose 2.4GHz or 5GHz of wireless signal for the AP located on the floor plan.
7. 622 Adjust the AP on the map to find out which place can have the best wireless coverage. At last, click Save.
VII-6-6 Traffic Graph Click Traffic Graph to open the web page. Choose one of the managed Access Points, LAN-A or LAN-B, daily or weekly for viewing data transmission chart. Click Refresh to renew the graph at any time. The horizontal axis represents time; the vertical axis represents the transmission rate (in kbps). Info Vigor2862 Series User’s Guide Enabling/Disabling such function will also enable/disable the External Devices function.
VII-6-7 Temperature Sensor Many VigorAP and Vigor router can be installed with temperature sensor. If VigorAP (e.g., VigorAP 910C) is managed under Vigor router (e.g, Vigor2862), then Vigor router can obtain the temperature change graph of the USB temperature sensor installed onto VigorAP. This page displays data including current temperature, maximum temperature, minimum temperature and average temperature. VII-6-8 Rogue AP Detection It displays the access point scanned by Vigor router.
points through wireless LAN connection. Specify the access points which are classified under each type. Refresh Min(s) Use the drop down list to specify the time to refresh the web page. Refresh Click such link to refresh the web page immediately. Ch Display the channel used by the detected access point. SSID Display the SSID specified for the detected access point. Mode Display the mode (AP or Ad Hoc) used by the detected access point. BSSID Display the MAC address of the detected access point.
Item Description AP’s MAC Address The MAC address of the selected AP will be displayed here automatically. AP’s SSID The SSID of the selected AP will be displayed here automatically. Add to Friendly APs - If the selected AP shall be treated as Friendly AP, simply click Add to change its classification from unknown to Friendly. Rogue APs - If the selected AP shall be treated as rogue AP, simply click Add to change its classification from unknown to Rogue.
VII-6-9 Event Log Time and event log for all of the APs managed by Vigor router will be shown on this page. It is userful for troubleshooting if required. VII-6-10 Total Traffic Such page will display the total traffic of data receiving and data transmitting for VigorAPs managed by Vigor router.
VII-6-11 Station Number The total number of the wireless clients will be shown on this page, no matter what mode of wireless connection (2.4G WLAN or 5G WLAN) used by wireless clients to access into Internet through VigorAP. VII-6-12 Load Balance The parameters configured for Load Balance can help to distribute the traffic for all of the access points registered to Vigor router. Thus, the bandwidth will not be occupied by certain access points.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description AP Load Balance It is used to determine the operation mode when the system detects overload between access points. Disable – Disable the function of AP load balance. By Station Number –The operation of load balance will be executed based on the station number configured in this page. It is used to limit the allowed number for the station connecting to the access point.
VII-6-13 Function Support List List the AP management functions that the Access Points support under different firmware versions.
Application Notes A-1 How to use AP Management function (in Vigor2862) to check AP status and deploy WLAN profile The administrator can manage the access points linked to Vigor2862. 1. Open External Devices>>Access Point Devices. Vigor2862 will detect the AP connecting to the router automatically and display as below: In this case, a device named with AP800_00507F6EE4980 has been detected by Vigor router. 2. Click the WLAN Profile tab to get the following page.
Info 4. 632 Apply to All APs can automatically apply the settings on Default profile to all of the access points registered to Vigor2862 later. Hence, it is not necessary for you to manually apply wireless profiles for APs respectively. Such feature will be convenient for people who want to quickly deploy multiple Vigor APs in a large exhibition to reach the goal of “plug and play” and “zero-configuration”. The following page allows you to modify related settings for 2.4G SSID of managed AP.
5. The following page is offered for you to modify related settings for 5G SSID of managed AP. Continue to make any changes you want. After finished all of the changes, simply click Finish. 6. Now, the AP (represented with AP800_00507F6EE4980) detected by Vigor router will be applied with the settings modified by Vigor router.
VII-7 Central Management (Switch) Vigor router can manage lots of VigorSwitch devices connected to it. Through profile and group settings, the administrator can execute firmware/configuration backup, restore for VigorSwitch device, reboot the device or return to factory default settings of VigorSwitch at one time.
Info VigorSwitch listed below Status means the switch is managed by Viogr2862; VigorSwitch listed below New Switch List means it is not managed by Vigor2862 yet. Click Add New to make the selected VigorSwitch to be managed by Vigor router. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Group Display the name link of the group. You can click the link to modify the group settings if required. Switch Name Display the name link of VigorSwitch.
It will be better to group VigorSwitch devices with the same model. VII-7-1-2 Switch Hierarchy Such page displays the hierarchy of VigorSwitch(es) managed under Vigor2862. Please note that, Shutdown Port is available for LAN port of VigorSwitch connects to a LAN device. When it is checked, after clicking OK, the network connection between that device and VigorSwitch will be terminated.
VII-7-2 Profile This page will show general information, such as name, group, IP address, MAC address, model and password of VigorSwitch only when it connects to Vigor2862 series. By clicking the index number link, a profile setting page for that switch will be shown. Note that each profile represents one VigorSwitch. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Index Click the number link to access into the switch profile. Note: Each connected VigorSwitch will have one setting profile.
2. Item Description Switch Name Type a name for the Switch. The purpose of name is used for identification. It is useful when there are many VigorSwitch (same modes) devices connecting to Vigor2862 seres. Comment Type the text in such field if additional explanation for the switch is required. Copy configuration from Check the box to copy configuration from other device. Use the drop down list to choose the one you need.
Setting page with LAN>>VLAN configured previously: 3. Click Save to save VLAN configuration. Then, click Port tab to access the following page: Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Description If required, type a brief description to explain the device connected to VigorSwitch via the LAN port. Port Control Disable Port – The port (e.
to connect VigorSwitch and Vigor2862 will not be shutdown by Vigor2862 series. Other LAN ports of VigorSwitch allow to connect to any LAN device. When it is checked, after clicking Save, the network connection between that device and VigorSwitch will be terminated. Schedule – Two sechule profiles can be specified here to force Vigor2862 executing specific action to VigorSwitch. Rate Limit 4. Check the box for typing the ingress rate / egress rate for the selected VigorSwitch.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Group Name Type a name as the group name. Different switches can be classified within a group. Group Password Type a password that administrator can use to access into the managed VigorSwitch connecting to Vigor2862 series. All of the switches under the same group can be accessed into via such group password. Existing Switch Display all of the VigorSwitch devices connecting to Vigor2862.
VII-7-4 Maintenance Such feature can execute configuration backup, restore of selected VigorSwitch device(s) or reboot the VigorSwitch devices remotely or reset the VigorSwitch devices with factory default settings, without accessing into the web user interface of VigorSwitch respectively. It is convenient for system administrator to manage VigorSwitch devices.
VII-7-5 Alert and Log Alert and Log is helpful for the user to understand the abnormal situation occurred in VigorSwitch quickly. When the system detects an error, information of abnormal condition will be recorded to the database; or the system will send an alert to the specified device (via e-mail or SMS) to warn the user.
Alert Levels and Action Level Name – Define names for representing the severity of alert event. The default names for index 1 to index 4 will be shown on each setting box. Index 5 to index 8 are reserved for user-defined. Color – Define the color for each level of alert. However, the color of index 1 is No color and unable to be changed. Create Log – Check the box to create log of alert. Such log will be seen on Alert Logs page. Note that No Log for index 1; and log for index 2 is enabled in default.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Switch Alert When VigorSwitch encounters the following alert events, alert mechanism will perform corresponding actions based on the servity level of the incident encountererd. Incident – At present, Cold Start, Warm Start, Disconnect and Reconnect will be treated as alert events. Level – Specify the severity level for each incident.
VII-7-5-3 Alert Logs The user can get the information by filtering the collective information based on the conditions specified in this page. Available settings are explained as follows: 646 Item Description Select Columns to Filter Logs Level – The alert can be divided into four levels, No Alert, Minor Alert, Moderate Alert and Major Alert. Check the one(s) you want to check in Alert Logs list. Type – Check the type (switch / port) of the log to be displayed in Alert Logs list.
VII-7-6 Database Setup The database of switch can be used to record alert logs and traffic history. This page is used to determine if it is necessary for the user information to be recorded in the database of switch. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Database to Record alert logs and traffic history Check the box to make the database (in USB disk) to record the alert logs and traffic history.
VII-7-7 Support List This page lists all models of VigorSwitch which can be managed by Vigor2862 via Central Management>>Switch.
VII-8 Central Management (External Devices) Vigor router can be used to connect with many types of external devices. In order to control or manage the external devices conveniently, open External Devices to make detailed configuration. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description External Device Syslog Check this box to display information of the detected device on Syslog.
When you finished the configuration, click OK to save it. Info 650 Only DrayTek products can be detected by this function.
Part VIII Others Define objects such as IP address, service type, keyword, file extension and others. These pre-defined objects can be applied in CSM. USB device connected on Vigor router can be regarded as a server or WAN interface. By way of Vigor router, clients on LAN can access, write and read data stored in USB storage disk with different applications.
VIII-1 Objects Settings Define objects such as IP address, service type, keyword, file extension and others. These pre-defined objects can be applied in CSM.
Web User Interface VIII-1-1 IP Object For IPs in a range and service ports in a limited range usually will be applied in configuring router’s settings, therefore we can define them with objects and bind them with groups for using conveniently. Later, we can select that object/group for applying it. For example, all the IPs in the same department can be defined with an IP object (a range of IP address). You can set up to 192 sets of IP Objects with different conditions.
Available settings are explained as follows: 654 Item Description View Use the drop down list to choose a type (Single Address, Range Address, Subnet Address, Mac Address or all) that IP object with the selected type will be shown on this page. Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles. Search Type a string of the IP object that you wan to search. Index Display the profile number that you can configure. Name Display the name of the object profile.
Export IP Object Usually, the IP objects can be created one by one through the web page of Objects>>IP Object. However, to a user who wants to save more time in bulk creating IP objects, a quick method is offered by Vigor router to modify the IP objects with a single file, a CSV file. All of the IP objects (or the template) can be exported as a file by clicking Download. Then the user can open the CSV file through Microsoft Excel and modify all the IP objects at the same time.
specified with LAN/DMZ/RT/VPN interface will be opened for you to choose in Edit Filter Rule page. 4. 656 Address Type Determine the address type for the IP address. Select Single Address if this object contains one IP address only. Select Range Address if this object contains several IPs within a range. Select Subnet Address if this object contains one subnet for IP address. Select Any Address if this object contains any IP address. Select Mac Address if this object contains Mac address.
VIII-1-2 IP Group This page allows you to bind several IP objects into one IP group. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles. Index Display the profile number that you can configure. Name Display the name of the group profile. To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below: 1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details. 2.
Available settings are explained as follows: 3. Item Description Name Type a name for this profile. Maximum 15 characters are allowed. Interface Choose WAN, LAN or Any to display all the available IP objects with the specified interface. Available IP Objects All the available IP objects with the specified interface chosen above will be shown in this box. Selected IP Objects Click >> button to add the selected IP objects in this box.
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below: 1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details. 2. The configuration page will be shown as follows: Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Name Type a name for this profile. Maximum 15 characters are allowed. Address Type Determine the address type for the IPv6 address. Select Single Address if this object contains one IPv6 address only.
Invert Selection 3. If it is checked, all the IPv6 addresses except the ones listed above will be applied later while it is chosen. After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration. VIII-1-4 IPv6 Group This page allows you to bind several IPv6 objects into one IPv6 group. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles. Index Display the profile number that you can configure.
Available settings are explained as follows: 3. Item Description Name Type a name for this profile. Maximum 15 characters are allowed. Available IPv6 Objects All the available IPv6 objects with the specified interface chosen above will be shown in this box. Selected IPv6 Objects Click >> button to add the selected IPv6 objects in this box. After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration.
VIII-1-5 Service Type Object You can set up to 96 sets of Service Type Objects with different conditions. Available settings are explained as follows: 662 Item Description Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles. Index Display the profile number that you can configure. Name Display the name of the object profile.
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below: 1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details. 2. The configuration page will be shown as follows: Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Name Type a name for this profile. Maximum 15 characters are allowed. Protocol Specify the protocol(s) which this profile will apply to. Source/Destination Port Source Port and the Destination Port columns are available for TCP/UDP protocol.
3. After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration. VIII-1-6 Service Type Group This page allows you to bind several service types into one group. Available settings are explained as follows: 664 Item Description Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles. Index Display the profile number that you can configure. Name Display the name of the group profile.
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below: 1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Group column for configuration in details. 2. The configuration page will be shown as follows: Available settings are explained as follows: 3. Item Description Name Type a name for this profile. Maximum 15 characters are allowed. Available Service Type Objects All the available service objects that you have added on Objects Setting>>Service Type Object will be shown in this box.
VIII-1-7 Keyword Object You can set 200 keyword object profiles for choosing as black /white list in CSM >>URL Web Content Filter Profile. Available settings are explained as follows: 666 Item Description Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles. Index Display the profile number that you can configure. Name Display the name of the object profile.
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below: 1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details. 2. The configuration page will be shown as follows: Available settings are explained as follows: 3. Item Description Name Type a name for this profile, e.g., game. Maximum 15 characters are allowed. Contents Type the content for such profile. For example, type gambling as Contents.
VIII-1-8 Keyword Group This page allows you to bind several keyword objects into one group. The keyword groups set here will be chosen as black /white list in CSM >>URL /Web Content Filter Profile. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles. Index Display the profile number that you can configure. Name Display the name of the group profile. Objects Display the keyword objects under this group.
Name Type a name for this group. Maximum 15 characters are allowed. Available Keyword Objects You can gather keyword objects from Keyword Object page within one keyword group. All the available Keyword objects that you have created will be shown in this box. Selected Keyword Objects 3. Click this box. button to add the selected Keyword objects in After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration.
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below: 1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Profile column for configuration in details. 2. The configuration page will be shown as follows: Available settings are explained as follows: 3. 670 Item Description Profile Name Type a name for this profile. The maximum length of the name you can set is 7 characters. Type a name for such profile and check all the items of file extension that will be processed in the router.
VIII-1-10 SMS/Mail Service Object SMS Service Object This page allows you to set ten profiles which will be applied in Application>>SMS/Mail Alert Service. Each item is explained as follows: Item Description Set to Factory Default Clear all of the settings and return to factory default settings. Index Display the profile number that you can configure. Profile Name Display the name for such SMS profile. SMS Provider Display the service provider which offers SMS service.
2. The configuration page will be shown as follows: Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Profile Name Type a name for such SMS profile. The maximum length of the name you can set is 31 characters. Service Provider Use the drop down list to specify the service provider which offers SMS service. Username Type a user name that the sender can use to register to selected SMS provider. The maximum length of the name you can set is 31 characters.
Customized SMS Service Vigor router offers several SMS service provider to offer the SMS service. However, if your service provider cannot be found from the service provider list, simply use Index 9 and Index 10 to make customized SMS service. The profile name for Index 9 and Index 10 are fixed. You can click the number (e.g., #9) under Index column for configuration in details. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Profile Name Display the name of this profile.
Username Type a user name that the sender can use to register to selected SMS provider. The maximum length of the name you can set is 31 characters. Password Type a password that the sender can use to register to selected SMS provider. The maximum length of the password you can set is 31 characters. Quota Type the total number of the messages that the router will send out. Sending Interval Type the shortest time interval for the system to send SMS.
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below: 1. Click the Mail Server tab, and click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details. 2. The configuration page will be shown as follows: Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Profile Name Type a name for such mail service profile. The maximum length of the name you can set is 31 characters. SMTP Server Type the IP address of the mail server. SMTP Port Type the port number for SMTP server.
Sending Interval Define the interval for the system to send the SMS out. 3. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration. VIII-1-11 Notification Object This page allows you to set ten profiles which will be applied in Application>>SMS/Mail Alert Service. You can set an object with different monitoring situation. To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below: 1. Open Object Setting>>Notification Object, and click the number (e.g.
2. The configuration page will be shown as follows: Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Profile Name Type a name for such notification profile. The maximum length of the name you can set is 15 characters. Category Display the types that will be monitored. Status Display the status for the category. You can check the box to be monitored. For example, the check box of CPE firmware upgrade fail under the category of Central VPN Management is checked.
VIII-1-12 String Object This page allows you to set string profiles which will be applied in route policy (domain name selection for destination) and etc. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Add Click it to open the following page for adding a new string object. Set to Factory Default Click it to clear all of the settings in this page. Index Display the number link of the string profile. String Display the string defined. Clear Choose the string that you want to remove.
VIII-1-13 Country Object The country object profile can determine which country/countries shall be blocked by the Vigor router’s Firewall. The country object, by grouping IP addresses for multiple countries, can be applied by other functions such as router policy destination (refer to the following figure for example). To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below: 1. Open Object Setting>>Country Object, and click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details.
2. The configuration page will be shown as follows: Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Name Type a name for such profile. The maximum length of the name you can set is 15 characters. Available Country / Selected Country Select any country from Available Country. Click >> to move the selected country and place on Selected Country. Note that one country profile can contain 1 up to 16 countries. 3.
Application Notes A-1 How to Send a Notification to Specified Phone Number via SMS Service in WAN Disconnection Follow the steps listed below: 1. Log into the web user interface of Vigor router. 2. Configure relational objects first. Open Object Settings>>SMS/Mail Server Object to get the following page. Index 1 to Index 8 allows you to choose the built-in SMS service provider.
682 4. After finished the settings, click OK to return to previous page. Now you have finished the configuration of the SMS Provider profile setting. 5. Open Object Settings>>Notification Object to configure the event conditions of the notification. 6. Choose any index number (e.g., Index 1 in this case) to configure conditions for sending the SMS.
7. After finished the settings, click OK to return to previous page. You have finished the configuration of the notification object profile setting. 8. Now, open Application >> SMS / Mail Alert Service. Use the drop down list to choose SMS Provider and the Notify Profile (specify the time of sending SMS). Then, type the phone number in the field of Recipient (the one who will receive the SMS). 9. Click OK to save the settings.
Remark: How the customize the SMS Provider Choose one of the Index numbers (9 or 10) allowing you to customize the SMS Provider. In the web page, type the URL string of the SMS provider and type the username and password. After clicking OK, the new added SMS provider will be added and will be available for you to specify for sending SMS out.
VIII-2 USB Application USB device connected on Vigor router can be regarded as a server or WAN interface. By way of Vigor router, clients on LAN can access, write and read data stored in USB storage disk with different applications. After setting the configuration in USB Application, you can type the IP address of the Vigor router and username/password created in USB Application>>USB User Management on the client software.
Web User Interface VIII-2-1 USB General Settings This page will determine the number of concurrent FTP connection, default charset for FTP server and enable SMB service. At present, the Vigor router can support USB storage disk with formats of FAT16 and FAT32 only. Therefore, before connecting the USB storage disk into the Vigor router, please make sure the memory format for the USB storage disk is FAT16 or FAT32.
SMB File Sharing Service Click Enable to invoke SMB service (file sharing) via the router. Access Mode LAN Only – Users coming from internet cannot connect to the SMB server of the router. LAN And WAN - Both LAN and WAN users can access SMB server of the router. NetBios Name Service For the NetBios service of USB storage disk, you have to specify a workgroup name and a host name. A workgroup name must not be the same as the host name.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Enable Check the box to activate this profile (account) for FTP service or SMB User service. Later, the user can use the username specified in this page to login into FTP server. Username Type the username for FTP/SMB users for accessing into FTP server (USB storage disk). Be aware that users cannot access into USB storage disk in anonymity.
Access Rule It determines the authority for such profile. Any user, who uses such profile for accessing into USB storage disk, must follow the rule specified here. File – Check the items (Read, Write and Delete) for such profile. Directory –Check the items (List, Create and Remove) for such profile. Before you click OK, you have to insert a USB storage disk into the USB interface of the Vigor router. Otherwise, you cannot save the configuration.
Upload Click this button to upload the selected file to the USB storage disk. The uploaded file in the USB diskette can be shared for other user through FTP. VIII-2-4 USB Device Status This page is to monitor the status for USB device connecting to Vigor router. . In addition, the status of the USB modem or USB printer or USB sensor connecting to Vigor router can be checked from such page. If you want to remove the storage disk from USB port in router, please click Disconnect USB Disk first.
VIII-2-5 Temperature Sensor A USB Thermometer is now available. It complements your installed DrayTek router installations which will help you monitor the server or data communications room environment and notify you if the server room or data communications room is overheating. During summer in particular, it is important to ensure that your server or data communications equipment are not overheating due to cooling system failures.
Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Display Settings Temperature Calibration - Type a value used for correcting the temperature error. Temperature Unit - Choose the display unit of the temperature. There are two types for you to choose. Alarm Settings Enable Syslog Alarm - The temperature log will be recorded on Syslog if it is enabled. Upper temperature limit/Lower temperature limit - Type the upper limit and lower limit for the system to send out temperature alert.
VIII-2-6 Modem Support List Such page provides the information about the brand name and model name of the USB modems which are supported by Vigor router.
VIII-2-7 SMB Client Support List SMB Client Support List provides the test status information for applications with file sharing operated under different platforms.
Application Notes A-1 How can I get the files from USB storage device connecting to Vigor router? Files on USB storage device can be reviewed by opening USB Applicaiton>>File Explorer. If it is necessary for you to delete, copy files on the device or write, paste files to the devcie, it must be done through SMB server or FTP server. SMB service is based on the original USB FTP service. You will need to setup USB FTP first. We would like to give brief instructions on USB FTP setup here. 1.
696 Vigor2862 Series User’s Guide
3. Setup a user account for the FTP service by using USB Application >>USB User Management. Click Enable to enable FTP/SMB User account. Here we add a new account "user1" and assign authorities “Read”, “Write” and “List” to it. 4. Click OK to save the configuration. 5. Make sure the FTP service is running properly. Please open a browser and type ftp://192.168.1.1. Use the account "user1" to login.
6. When the following screen appears, it means the FTP service is running properly. 7. Return to USB Application >> USB Device Status. The information for FTP server will be shown as below. Now, users in LAN of Vigor2862 can access into the USB storage device by typing ftp://192.168.1.1 on any browser. They can add or remove files / directories, depending on the Access Rule for FTP account settings in USB Application >>USB User Management.
Part XI Troubleshooting This part will guide you to solve abnormal situations if you cannot access into the Internet after installing the router and finishing the web configuration.
XI-1 Diagnostics This section will guide you to solve abnormal situations if you cannot access into the Internet after installing the router and finishing the web configuration. Please follow sections below to check your basic installation status stage by stage. Checking if the hardware status is OK or not. Checking if the network connection settings on your computer are OK or not. Pinging the router from your computer. Checking if the ISP settings are OK or not.
Web User Interface Fisrt, take a look at the menu items under Diagnostics. Diagnostic Tools provide a useful way to view or diagnose the status of your Vigor router. XI-1-1 Dial-out Triggering Click Diagnostics and click Dial-out Triggering to open the web page. The internet connection (e.g., PPPoE) is triggered by a package sending from the source IP address.
Refresh Click it to reload the page. XI-1-2 Routing Table Click Diagnostics and click Routing Table to open the web page. Available settings are explained as follows: 702 Item Description Refresh Click it to reload the page.
XI-1-3 ARP Cache Table Click Diagnostics and click ARP Cache Table to view the content of the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) cache held in the router. The table shows a mapping between an Ethernet hardware address (MAC Address) and an IP address. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Show Specify LAN and VLAN to display related information. In default, this page will display all of the information about LAN and VLAN. Refresh Click it to reload the page.
XI-1-4 IPv6 Neighbour Table The table shows a mapping between an Ethernet hardware address (MAC Address) and an IPv6 address. This information is helpful in diagnosing network problems, such as IP address conflicts, etc. Click Diagnostics and click IPv6 Neighbour Table to open the web page. Available settings are explained as follows: 704 Item Description Refresh Click it to reload the page.
XI-1-5 DHCP Table The facility provides information on IP address assignments. This information is helpful in diagnosing network problems, such as IP address conflicts, etc. Click Diagnostics and click DHCP Table to open the web page. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Index It displays the connection item number. IP Address It displays the IP address assigned by this router for specified PC.
XI-1-6 NAT Sessions Table Click Diagnostics and click NAT Sessions Table to open the list page. Available settings are explained as follows: 706 Item Description Private IP:Port It indicates the source IP address and port of local PC. #Pseudo Port It indicates the temporary port of the router used for NAT. Peer IP:Port It indicates the destination IP address and port of remote host. Interface It displays the representing number for different interface. Refresh Click it to reload the page.
XI-1-7 DNS Cache Table Click Diagnostics and click DNS Cache Table to open the web page. The record of domain Name and the mapping IP address for answering the DNS query from LAN will be stored on Vigor router’s Cache temporarily and displayed on Diagnostics >> DNS Cache Table. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Clear Click this link to remove the result on the window. Refresh Click it to reload the page. When an entry’s TTL is larger than….
XI-1-8 Ping Diagnosis Click Diagnostics and click Ping Diagnosis to open the web page. or Available settings are explained as follows: 708 Item Description IPV4 /IPV6 Choose the interface for such function.
by the router automatically. Ping to Use the drop down list to choose the destination that you want to ping. IP Address Type the IP address of the Host/IP that you want to ping. Ping IPv6 Address Type the IPv6 address that you want to ping. Run Click this button to start the ping work. The result will be displayed on the screen. Clear Click this link to remove the result on the window.
Available settings are explained as follows: 710 Item Description Enable Data Flow Monitor Check this box to enable this function. Refresh Seconds Use the drop down list to choose the time interval of refreshing data flow that will be done by the system automatically. Refresh Click this link to refresh this page manually. Index Display the number of the data flow. IP Address Display the IP address of the monitored device. TX rate (kbps) Display the transmission speed of the monitored device.
Unblock –The device with the IP address will be blocked for five minutes. The remaining time will be shown on the session column. Click it to cancel the IP address blocking. APP QoS Use the drop down list to change the priority in data transmission for the specified IP address (host). Current /Peak/Speed Current means current transmission rate and receiving rate for WAN interface. Peak means the highest peak value detected by the router in data transmission.
XI-1-10 Traffic Graph Click Diagnostics and click Traffic Graph to open the web page. Choose WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4 Bandwidth, Sessions, Ping Detect, daily or weekly for viewing different traffic graph. Click Reset to zero the accumulated RX/TX (received and transmitted) data of WAN. Click Refresh to renew the graph at any time. The horizontal axis represents time. Yet the vertical axis has different meanings.
XI-1-11 VPN Graph Click Diagnostics and click VPN Graph to open the web page.
XI-1-12 Trace Route Click Diagnostics and click Trace Route to open the web page. This page allows you to trace the routes from router to the host. Simply type the IP address of the host in the box and click Run. The result of route trace will be shown on the screen. or Available settings are explained as follows: 714 Item Description IPv4 / IPv6 Click one of them to display corresponding information for it. Trace through Use the drop down list to choose the interface that you want to ping through.
Protocol Use the drop down list to choose the protocol that you want to ping through. Host/IP Address It indicates the IP address of the host. Trace Host/IP Address It indicates the IPv6 address of the host. Run Click this button to start route tracing work. Clear Click this link to remove the result on the window. XI-1-13 Syslog Explorer Such page provides real-time syslog and displays the information on the screen.
Stop record when fulls – When the capacity of syslog is full, the system will stop recording. Always record the new event – only the newest events will be recorded by the system. Time Display the time of the event occurred. Message Display the information for each event. For USB Syslog This page displays the syslog recorded on the USB storage disk. Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Time Display the time of the event occurred. Log Type Display the type of the record.
XI-1-15 DSL Status Such page is useful for RD debug or web technician. XI-1-16 High Availability Status All of the routers under the same DARP (DrayTek Address resolution Protocol) group can be viewed in such page. However, only partial information of the router status will be displayed.
Available settings are explained as follows: 718 Item Description Details/Back Details – Click it to display detailed status about HA configuration for the selected router. Back – Return to previous page. HA Setup Click it to open Applications>>High Availability for modifying the configuration. Renew Click it to get the newest status of other router (except the primary router). Refresh Click it to get the newest status of the primary router. Status “!” means an error has occurred.
Cick the link of Router Name, IP or Details, the following page will be displayed on the screen. XI-1-17 Authentication Information Authentication User List Such page displays authentication jobs made by Internal RADIUS or Local 802.1X. When the mouse cursor moves to the name link under User Name, the connection message (including authentication failed information) about internal RADIUS or local 802.1X service will be shown by a popped up dialog box.
Available settings are explained as follows: 720 Item Description Enable Check the box to enable such function. Refresh Click it to update current page. Clear Click it to remove all of the records. Syslog Type Specify RADIUS, 802.1X or All to display related authentication information log. Display Mode Choose the mode you want to display the related information on the following table. Stop record when fulls – When the capacity of CVM log is full, the system will stop recording.
XI-1-18 DoS Flood Table This page can display content of IP connection detected by DoS Flooding Defense mechanism. It is useful and convenient for network engineers (e.g., MIS engineer) to inspect the network environment to find out if there is any abnormal connection. Information of IP traced and destination port used for SYN Flood, UDP Flood and ICMP Flood attacks will be detected and shown respectively on different pages.
However, if an IP address is comfirmed to be blocked due to its abnormal behavior, click the Blocking IP List tab to block it forever. For example, IP address “192.168.1.99” (displayed on the following web page) will be blocked forever. Available settings are explained as follows: 722 Item Description Blocking IP Type the IP address in this field and click add. It will be added to the IP List and appear in the right frame. IP list in the right frame will be blocked by Vigor system permanatly.
XI-1-19 Route Policy Diagnosis With the analysis done by such page, possible path (static route, routing table or policy route) of the packets sent out of the router can be traced. or Available settings are explained as follows: Item Description Mode Analyze a single packet – Choose such mode to make Vigor router analyze how a single packet will be sent by a route policy.
ICMP/UDP/TCP/ANY- Specify a protocol for diagnosis. Src IP – Type an IP address as the source IP. Dst IP – Type an IP address as the destination IP. Dst Port – Use the drop down list to specify the destination port. Analyze – Click it to perform the job of analyzing. The analyzed result will be shown on the page.. Input File It is available when Analyze multiple packets.. is selected as Mode. Select – Click the download link to get a blank example file. Then, click such button to select that blank “.
XI-2 Checking If the Hardware Status Is OK or Not Follow the steps below to verify the hardware status. 1. Check the power line and WLAN/LAN cable connections. Refer to “I-2 Hardware Installation” for details. 2. Turn on the router. Make sure the ACT LED blink once per second and the correspondent LAN LED is bright. 3. If not, it means that there is something wrong with the hardware status. Simply back to “I-2 Hardware Installation” to execute the hardware installation again. And then, try again.
XI-3 Checking If the Network Connection Settings on Your Computer Is OK or Not Sometimes the link failure occurs due to the wrong network connection settings. After trying the above section, if the link is stilled failed, please do the steps listed below to make sure the network connection settings is OK. For Windows Info 726 The example is based on Windows 7. As to the examples for other operation systems, please refer to the similar steps or find support notes in www.DrayTek.com. 1.
4. Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IP) and then click Properties. 5. Select Obtain an IP address automatically and Obtain DNS server address automatically. Finally, click OK.
For Mac OS 728 1. Double click on the current used Mac OS on the desktop. 2. Open the Application folder and get into Network. 3. On the Network screen, select Using DHCP from the drop down list of Configure IPv4.
XI-4 Pinging the Router from Your Computer The default gateway IP address of the router is 192.168.1.1. For some reason, you might need to use “ping” command to check the link status of the router. The most important thing is that the computer will receive a reply from 192.168.1.1. If not, please check the IP address of your computer. We suggest you setting the network connection as get IP automatically. (Please refer to the previous section IX-3) Please follow the steps below to ping the router correctly.
730 Vigor2862 Series User’s Guide
XI-5 Checking If the ISP Settings are OK or Not If WAN connection cannot be up, check if the LEDs (according to the LED explanations listed on section I-1-1, Indicators and Connectors) are correct or not. If the LEDs are off, please: Change the Physical Type from Auto negotiation to other values (e.g., 100M full duplex). Next, change the physical type of modem (e.g., DSL/FTTX(GPON)/Cable modem) offered by ISP with the same value configured in Vigor router.
XI-6 Problems for 3G/4G Network Connection When you have trouble in using 3G/4G network transmission, please check the following: Check if USB LED lights on or off You have to wait about 15 seconds after inserting 3G/4G USB Modem into your Vigor2862. Later, the USB LED will light on which means the installation of USB Modem is successful. If the USB LED does not light on, please remove and reinsert the modem again. If it still fails, restart Vigor2862.
XI-7 Backing to Factory Default Setting If Necessary Sometimes, a wrong connection can be improved by returning to the default settings. Try to reset the router by software or hardware. Such function is available in Admin Mode only. Info After pressing factory default setting, you will loose all settings you did before. Make sure you have recorded all useful settings before you pressing. The password of factory default is null. Software Reset You can reset the router to factory default via Web page.
After restore the factory default setting, you can configure the settings for the router again to fit your personal request. XI-8 Contacting DrayTek If the router still cannot work correctly after trying many efforts, please contact your dealer for further help right away. For any questions, please feel free to send e-mail to support@DrayTek.com.
Appendix I: VLAN Applications on Vigor Router Virtual Local Area Network is so-called VLAN. It offers the logical grouping technique to separate the physical ports of Ethernet switches, thus we can manage our local network easier, more flexible and secure. For instance, you’re a networking administrator in your company and you’re planning to isolate the visitors’ traffics from your private network for security considerations because you cannot ensure that visitors’ computer is clean.
Vigor routers [Note] support Tag-based feature both on LAN and WAN interfaces. The next we’ll demonstrate our web design and how to configure the settings by introducing the functionalities of Vigor router. [Note] Broadband router: Vigor2920/Vigor3200/Vigor2925/Vigo2960/Vigor3900 Modem router: Vigor2850/Vigor2862 VLAN Packets on Vigor routers Trunk mode of LAN Trunk Port can carry the packets with VID but replace the Non-VID packet as the VID of Trunk port while forwarding the packets to another switch.
Vigor2862 Series User’s Guide 737
LAN VLAN applications on Vigor router 738 Multi Subnet (VLAN of LAN) Vigor2862 Series User’s Guide
Port-based mode Tag-based mode By above settings, there are four private networks will be created and computers attached with each of LAN ports or SSIDs which are able to obtain a private IP address from each DHCP server (LAN1/LAN2/LAN3/LAN4). However, the traffics of the LAN port or SSID that are NOT being grouped in the same VLAN are unable to forward to each other.
Port-based mode Tag-based mode To deploy a guest network, which serves your guests the internet accessibility, but the traffics have to be isolated from your private network due to the security considerations, it can be done by above settings. However, a switch support VLAN function is need if VLAN Tag enabled. Triple Play (Multi-WAN) NAT mode with VLAN Following settings, the set-top box (STB) is able to attach with any LAN port.
Vigor2862 Series User’s Guide 741
Bridge mode with VLAN Set-top box (STB) or the other kinds of media devices are able to attach with Port4 or Port5 of LAN. Those devices that attached with Port4 or Port5 are able to access the services network directly which your ISP provided.
Part X Telnet Commands Vigor2862 Series User’s Guide 743
Accessing Telnet of Vigor2862 This chapter also gives you a general description for accessing telnet and describes the firmware versions for the routers explained in this manual. Info For Windows 7 user, please make sure the Windows Features of Telnet Client has been turned on under Control Panel>>Programs. Type cmd and press Enter. The Telnet terminal will be open later. In the following window, type Telnet 192.168.1.1 as below and press Enter.
For users using previous Windows system (e.g., 2000/XP), simply click Start >> Run and type Telnet 192.168.1.1 in the Open box as below. Next, type admin/admin for Account/Password. And, type ? to get a list of valid/common commands.
Telnet Command: adsl txpct /adsl rxpct This command allows the user to adjust the percentage of data transmission (receiving/transmitting) for QoS application. Syntax adsl txpct [auto:percent] adsl rxpct [auto:percent] Parameter Description auto It means auto detection of ADSL transmission packet. percent Specify the percentage of ADSL transmission packet. Available range is 10-100.
Parameter Description ? Display the command syntax of “adsl ppp”. pvc_no It means the PVC number and the adjustable range is from 0 (Channel-1) to 7(Channel-8). Encap Different numbers represent different modes. 0 : VC_MUX, 1: LLC/SNAP, 2: LLC_Bridge, 3: LLC_Route, 4: VCMUX_Bridge 5: VCMUX_Route, 6: IPoE. Proto It means the protocol used to connect Internet. Different numbers represent different protocols. 0: PPPoA, 1: PPPoE, 2: MPoA. Modu 0: T1.413, 2: G.
AcquireIP: Dhcp_client(1) Idle timeout:-1 Username=draytek Password=draytek Telnet Command: adsl bridge This command can specify a LAN port (LAN1 to LAN4) for mapping to certain PVC, and the mapping port/PVC will be operated in bridge mode. Syntax adsl bridge [pvc_no/status/save/enable/disable] [on/off/clear/tag tag_no] [service type] [px ... ] Syntax Description Parameter Description pvc_no It means pvc number and must be between 0(Channel 1) to 7(Channel 8).
Telnet Command: adsl idle This command can make the router accessing into the idle status. If you want to invoke the router again, you have to reboot the router by using “reboot” command. Syntax adsl idle [on | tcpmessage | tcpmessage_off] Syntax Description Parameter Description on DSL is under test mode. DSL debug tool mode is off. DSL debug tool mode is on. DSL debug tool mode is off. tcpmessage tcpmessage_off Example > % % > % adsl idle on DSL is under [IDLE/QUIET] test mode.
Telnet Command: adsl oamlb This command is used to test if the connection between CPE and CO is OK or not. Syntax adsl oamlb [n][type] adsl oamlb chklink [on/off] adsl oamlb [log_on/log_off] Syntax Description Parameter Description n It means the total number of transmitted packets. type It means the protocol that you can use. 1 – for F4 Seg-to-Seg (VP level) 2 – for F4 End-to-End (VP level) 4 – for F5 Seg-to-Seg (VC level) 5 – for F5 End-to-End (VC level) chklink Check the DSL connection.
Telnet Command: adsl annex This command can display the annex interface of this router. Example > adsl annex % hardware is annex B. % modem code is annex B; built at 01/15,07:34. Telnet Command: adsl automode This command is used to add or remove ADSL modes (such as ANNEXL, ANNEXM and ANNEXJ) supported by Multimode. Syntax adsl automode [add|remove|set|default|show] [adsl_mode] Syntax Description Parameter Description add It means to add ADSL mode. remove It means to remove ADSL mode.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts --- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- ---- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- -Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts dB .
This command allows you to configure user-defined CPE vendor ID. Syntax adsl vendorid [status/on/off/ set vid0 vid1] Syntax Description Parameter Description status Display current status of user-defined vendor ID. on Enable the user-defined function. off Disable the user-defined function. set vid0 vid1 It means to set user-defined vendor ID with vid0 and vid1. The vendor ID shall be set with HEX format, ex: 00fe7244: 79612f21.
0 1 0 1 2 200 2 3 0 3 4 0 4 5 0 5 6 0 6 7 0 7 8 0 > adsl atm mbs 2 300 max % MBS is 300 for pvc 2. Telnet Command: adsl pvcbinding This command can configure PVC to PVC binding. Such command is available only for PPPoE and MPoA 1483 Bridge mode. Syntax adsl pvcbinding [pvc_x pvc_y | status | -1 ] Syntax Description Parameter Description pvc_x It means the PVC number for the source. pvc_y It means the PVC number that the source PVC will be bound to. status Display a table for PVC binding group.
> adsl inventory cpe G.994 vendor ID G.994.1 country code G.994.1 provider code G.994.1 vendor info System vendor ID System country code System provider code System vendor info Version number Version number(16 octets) Self-test result Transmission mode capability > : 0XB5004946544E5444 : 0XB500 : IFTN : 0X5444 : 0XB5004946544E0000 : 0XB500 : IFTN : 0X000 : 3.8.
tcpmessage tcpmessage_off DSL debug tool mode is on. DSL debug tool mode is off. Example > % % > % vdsl idle on DSL is under [IDLE/QUIET] test mode. DSL debug tool mode is off. vdsl idle tcpmessage Set DSL debug tool mode on. Please reboot system to take effect. > vdsl idle tcpmessage_off % Set DSL debug tool mode off. Please reboot system to take effect. Telnet Command: vdsl drivermode This command is useful for laboratory to measure largest power of data transmission.
> vdsl showbins 2 30 DOWNSTREAM : ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts --- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- ---- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- -Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts dB .
Syntax vdsl vendorid [status/on/off/ set vid0 vid1] Syntax Description Parameter Description status Display current status of user-defined vendor ID. on Enable the user-defined function. off Disable the user-defined function. set vid0 vid1 It means to set user-defined vendor ID with vid0 and vid1. The vendor ID shall be set with HEX format, ex: 00fe7244: 79612f21.
Telnet Command: csm appe prof Commands under CSM allow you to set CSM profile to define policy profiles for different policy of IM (Instant Messenger)/P2P (Peer to Peer) application. “csm appe prof “ is used to configure the APP Enforcement Profile name. Such profile will be applied in Default Rule of Firewall>>General Setup for filtering.
Example >csm appe set -i 1 -a 1 1 Profile 1 - : action set to Pass. > Telnet Command: csm appe show It is used to display group (IM/P2P/Protocol and Others) information APP Enforcement Profile. csm appe show [-a|-i|-p|-t|-m] Syntax Description Parameter Description -a View the configuration status for All groups. -i View the configuration status of IM group. -p View the configuration status of P2P group. -t View the configuration status of protocol group.
Group Type Index Name Enable A vance Enable Advance abbreviation: Message, File Transfer, Game, Conference, and Other Advance abbreviation: : M, F, G, C, and O ------------------------------------------------------------------OTHERS TUNNEL 75 DNSCrypt Disable OTHERS TUNNEL 76 DynaPass Disable OTHERS TUNNEL 77 FreeU Disable OTHERS TUNNEL 78 HTTP Proxy Disable OTHERS TUNNEL 79 HTTP Tunnel Disable OTHERS TUNNEL 80 Hamachi Disable OTHERS TUNNEL 81 MS Teredo Disable OTHERS TUNNEL 82 MS Teredo Disable OTHERS TUNN
Telnet Command: csm appe email It is used to set notification e-mail for APPE signature based on the settings configured in System Maintenance>>SysLog/Mail Alert Setup (in which, the box of APPE Signature is checkd under Enable E-Mail Alert). csm appe email [-e|-d|-s] Syntax Description Parameter Description -e Enable notification e-mail mechanism. -d Disable notification e-mail mechanism. -s Send an example e-mail. Example > csm appe email -e Enable APPE email.
VALUE Number 0 to 3 represent different conditions. 0: It means Bundle: Pass. 1: It means Bundle: Block. 2: It means Either: URL Access Control First. 3: It means Either: Web Feature First. -l It means the log type of the profile. They are: P: Pass, B: Block, A: All, N: None MSG It means to specify the Administration Message, less then 255 characters uac It means to set URL Access Control part. wf It means to set Web Feature part.
-v It means to view the protocol configuration of the CSM profile. -e It means to enable the function of URL Access Control. -d It means to disable the function of URL Access Control. -a Set the action of specific application, P or B. B: Block. The web access meets the URL Access Control will be blocked. P: Pass. The web access meets the URL Access Control will be passed. -i Prevent the web access from any IP address. E: Enable the function. The Internet access from any IP address will be blocked.
Telnet Command: csm ucf obj INDEX wf It means to configure the settings regarding to Web Feature (wf). Syntax csm ucf obj INDEX wf -v csm ucf obj INDEX wf -e csm ucf obj INDEX wf -d csm ucf obj INDEX wf -a P|B csm ucf obj INDEX wf -s WEB_FEATURE csm ucf obj INDEX wf -u WEB_FEATURE csm ucf obj INDEX wf -f File_Extension_Object_index Syntax Description Parameter Description INDEX It means to specify the index number of CSM profile, from 1 to 8.
[ ]Enable Restrict Web Feature Action:[pass] File Extension Object Index : [0] [V] Cookie [ ] Proxy [ ] Upload Profile Name : [] Telnet Command: csm wcf It means to configure the settings regarding to web control filter (wcf).
P: Pass, B: Block, A: All, N: None -o Set the keyword object. KEY_WORD_Object_Index Specify the index number of the object profile. -g Set the keyword group. KEY_WORD_Group_Index Specify the index number of the group profile. -w It means to set the action for the black and white list. E:Enable, D:Disable, P:Pass, B:Block -s It means to choose the items under CATEGORY or WEB_GROUP. -u It means to discard items under CATEGORY or WEB_GROUP.
Example > csm wcf obj 1 -n test_wcf Profile Index: 1 Profile Name:[test_wcf] []White/Black list Action:[block] No Obj NO. Object Name --- -------- --------------------------------No Grp NO.
csm dnsf profile_edit INDEX -c CACHE_TIME Syntax Description Parameter Description enable Enable or disable DNS Filter. ON: enable. OFF: disable. syslog Determine the content of records transmitting to Syslog. P: Pass. Records for the packets passing through DNS filter will be sent to Syslog. B: Block. Records for the packets blocked by DNS filter will be sent to Syslog. A: All. Records for the packets passing through or blocked by DNS filter will be sent to Syslog. N: None.
Telnet Command: ddns log Displays the DDNS log. Example >ddns log > Telnet Command: ddns time Sets and displays the DDNS time. Syntax ddns time Syntax Description Parameter Description Update in minutes Type the value as DDNS time. The range is from 1 to 14400.
TIMEOUT It means the time (seconds) that a flooding attack will be blocked. Set a value larger than 5. -a It means to enable the defense function for all attacks listed in ATTACK_0. -e It means to enable defense function for a specific attack(s). ATTACK_0 It means to specify a name of the following attacks: ip_option, tcp_flag, land, teardrop, smurf, pingofdeath, traceroute, icmp_frag, syn_frag, unknow_proto, fraggle. -d It means to disable the defense function for a specific attack(s).
n=-1: Always-on n=1 ~ 999: Idle time for offline (default 180 seconds) -i It means that PPPoE server will assign an IP address specified here for CPE (PPPoE client). If you type 0.0.0.0 as the , ISP will assign suitable IP address for you. However, if you type an IP address here, the router will use that one as a fixed IP. -w It means to assign WAN IP address for such connection. Please type an IP address here for WAN port.
WAN1 ISP Name set to tcom WAN1 Username set to username WAN1 Password set successful WAN1 PPP Authentication Type set to PAP/CHAP WAN1 Idle timeout set to always-on WAN1 Gateway IP set to 0.0.0.0 > internet -V WAN1 Internet Mode:PPPoE ISP Name: tcom Username: username Authentication: PAP/CHAP Idle Timeout: -1 WAN IP: Dynamic IP Telnet Command: ip pubsubnet This command allows users to enable or disable the IP routing subnet for your router.
% Now: 192.168.0.1 > ip pubaddr 192.168.2.5 % Set public subnet IP address done !!! Telnet Command: ip pubmask This command allows users to set the mask for IP routed subnet of your router. Syntax ip pubmask ? ip pubmask Syntax Description Parameter Description ? Display an IP address which allows users set as the public subnet mask. public subnet IP address Specify a subnet mask. The system will set the one that you specified as the public subnet mask.
> ip aux ?%% ip aux add [IP] [Join to NAT Pool] %% ip aux remove [Index] %% %% %% Where IP = Auxiliary WAN IP Address. Join to NAT Pool = 0 or 1. Index = The Index number of table. Now auxiliary WAN1 IP Address table: Index no. Status IP address NAT IP pool ---------------------------------------------------1 Disable 0.0.0.0 Yes 2 Enable 192.168.1.65 Yes When you type ip aux?, the current auxiliary WAN IP Address table will be shown as the following: Index no.
Telnet Command: ip nmask This command allows users to set/add a specified netmask for your router. Syntax ip nmask [IP netmask] Syntax Description Parameter Description IP netmask It means the netmask of LAN IP. Example > ip nmask 255.255.0.0 % Set IP netmask OK !!! Telnet Command: ip arp ARP displays the matching condition for IP and MAC address.
Example > ip arp accept status Accept illegal source mac arp: disable Accept illegal dest mac arp: disable Accept VRRP mac into arp table: disable > ip arp status [ARP Table] Index IP Address MAC Address 1 192.168.1.113 00-05-5D-E4-D8-EE Netbios Name A1000351 Telnet Command: ip dhcpc This command is available for WAN DHCP.
DHCP Server IP WAN Ipm WAN Netmask WAN Gateway Primary DNS Secondary DNS Leased Time Leased Time T1 Leased Time T2 Leased Elapsed Leased Elapsed T1 Leased Elapsed T2 : : : : : : : : : : : : 172.16.3.7 172.16.3.40 255.255.255.0 172.16.3.1 168.95.192.1 0.0.0.0 259200 129600 226800 259194 129594 226794 Telnet Command: ip ping This command allows users to ping IP address of WAN1/WAN2/PVC3/PVC4/PVC5 for verifying if the WAN connection is OK or not.
Example >ip tracert 22.128.2.62 WAN1 Traceroute to 22.128.2.62, 30 hops max 1 172.16.3.7 10ms 2 172.16.1.2 10ms 3 Request Time out. 4 168.95.90.66 50ms 5 211.22.38.134 50ms 6 220.128.2.62 50ms Trace complete Telnet Command: ip telnet This command allows users to access specified device by telnet. Syntax ip telnet [IP address][Port] Syntax Description Parameter Description IP address Type the WAN or LAN IP address of the remote device. Port Type a port number (e.g., 23). Available settings: 0 ~65535.
Telnet Command: ip wanrip This command allows users to set the RIP (routing information protocol) of WAN IP. Syntax ip wanrip [ifno] -e [0/1] Syntax Description Parameter Description ifno It means the connection interface. 1: WAN1,2: WAN2, 3: PVC3,4: PVC4,5: PVC5 Note: PVC3 ~PVC5 are virtual WANs. -e It means to disable or enable RIP setting for specified WAN interface. 1: Enable the function of setting RIP of WAN IP. 0: Disable the function.
Telnet Command: ip route This command allows users to set static route. Syntax ip route add [dst] [netmask][gateway][ifno][rtype] ip route del [dst] [netmask][rtype] ip route status ip route cnc ip route default [wan1/wan2/off/?] ip route clean [1/0] Syntax Description Parameter Description add It means to add an IP address as static route. del It means to delete specified IP address. status It means current status of static route. dst It means the IP address of the destination.
Telnet Command: ip igmp_proxy This command allows users to enable/disable igmp proxy server. Syntax ip igmp_proxy set ip igmp_proxy reset ip igmp_proxy wan ip igmp_proxy t_home[on/off/show/help] ip igmp_proxy query ip igmp_proxy ppp [0/1] ip igmp_proxy status Syntax Description Parameter Description set It means to enable proxy server. reset It means to disable proxy server. wan It means to specify WAN interface for IGMP service. t_home It means to specify t_home proxy server for using.
Telnet Command: ip dmz Specify MAC address of certain device as the DMZ host.
[block/unblock][IP] It means to block/unblock the specified IP address. Block: The IP cannot access Internet through the router. Unblock: The specified IP can access Internet through the router. add It means to add the session limits in an IP range. del It means to delete the session limits in an IP range. IP1-IP2 It means the range of IP address specified for this command. num It means the number of the session limits, e.g., 100. p2pnum It means the number of the session limits, e.g.
tx It means to set transmission rate for bandwidth limit. rx It means to set receiving rate for bandwidth limit. shared It means that the bandwidth will be shared for the IP range. Example > ip bandwidth default 200 800 > ip bandwidth add 192.168.1.50-192.168.1.100 10 60 > ip bandwidth status IP range: 192.168.1.50 - 192.168.1.100 : Tx:10K Rx:60K Current ip Bandwidth limit is turn off Auto adjustment is off Telnet Command: ip bindmac This command allows users to set IP-MAC binding for LAN host.
Example > ip bindmac add 192.168.1.46 00:50:7f:22:33:55 just for test > ip bindmac show ip bind mac function is turned ON IP : 192.168.1.
Telnet Command: ip maxnatuser This command is used to set the maximum number of NAT users. Syntax ip maxnatuser user no Syntax Description Parameter Description User no A number specified here means the total NAT users that Vigor router supports. 0 – It means no limitation. Example > ip maxnatuser 100 % Max NAT user = 100 Telnet Command: ip policy_rt This command is used to set the IP policy route profile. Syntax ip policy_rt [- | ...
Any: It means any port number can be used as destination port. -G [default/specific] Specify the gateway mode. -L [default/specific] Specify the failover gateway mode. -s [value] Indicate the source IP start. Value: The type format shall be “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. (e.g, 192.168.1.0) -S [value] Indicate the source IP end. Value: The type format shall be “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. (e.g, 192.168.1.100) -d [value] Indicate the destination IP start. Value: The type format shall be “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. (e.g, 192.168.2.
Value: Available settings include, 0: Disable the function of “failback”. 1: Enable the function of “failback”. -v: View current failback setting. Diagnose for Policy Route -s [value] It means “source IP”. Value: Available settings include: Any: It indicates any IP address can be used as source IP address. “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”: The type format (e.g, 192.168.1.0). -d [value] It means “destination IP”. Value : Available settings include: Any: It indicates any IP address can be used as destination IP address.
-i Type the index number of the profile. -l List the content of LAN DNS profile (including domain name, IP address and message). -n Set domain name. -p Set profile name for LAN DNS. -r Reset the settings for selected profile. Example > % > % > % % % % % > ip dnsforward -i 1 -n ftp.drayTek.com Configure Set1's DomainName:ftp.drayTek.com ip dnsforward -i 1 -a 172.16.1.1 Configure Set1's IP:172.16.1.
FF02::2 FF02::1:FF00:0 FF02::1 Telnet Command: ip6 dhcp req_opt This command is used to configure option-request settings for DHCPv6 client. Syntax ip6 dhcp req_opt [LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface#] [- | ... ] Syntax Description Parameter Description req_opt It means option-request. LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface# It means to specify LAN or WAN interface for such address. [ |…] The available commands with parameters are listed below.
Syntax Description Parameter Description client It means the dhcp client settings. [ |…] The available commands with parameters are listed below. […] means that you can type in several commands in one line. -a It means to show current DHCPv6 status. -p [IAID] It means to request identity association ID for Prefix Delegation. -n [IAID] It means to request identity association ID for Non-temporary Address. -c [parameter] It means to send rapid commit to server.
0: Disable -e It means to enable or disable the DHCPv6 server. 1: Enable 0: Disable Example > > > > % % % % % ip6 dhcp server -d FF02::1 ip6 dhcp server -i ff02::1 ip6 dhcp server -x ff02::3 ip6 dhcp server -a Interface LAN has following DHCPv6 server settings: DHCPv6 server disabled maximum address of the pool: FF02::3 minimum address of the pool: FF02::1 1st DNS IPv6 Addr: FF02::1 Telnet Command: ip6 internet This command allows you to configure settings for accessing Internet.
= type a name as the username (maximum 63 characters). -p It means to set Password. = type a password (maximum 63 characters). -s It means to set Tunnel Server IP. = IPv4 address or URL (maximum 63 characters). -d It means to set the primary DNS Server IP. = type an IPv6 address for first DNS server. -D It means to set the secondary DNS Server IP. = type an IPv6 address for second DNS server.
Telnet Command: ip6 neigh This command allows you to display IPv6 neighbour table. Syntax ip6 neigh -s[ inet6_addr] [eth_addr] [LAN|WAN1|WAN2] ip6 neigh -d [inet6_addr] [LAN|WAN1|WAN2] ip6 neigh -a [inet6_addr] [-N LAN|WAN1|WAN2] Syntax Description Parameter Description -s It means to add a neighbour. -d It means to delete a neighbour. -a It means to show neighbour status. inet6_addr Type an IPv6 address eth_addr Type submask address. LAN|WAN1|WAN2 Specify an interface for the neighbor.
Telnet Command: ip6 pneigh This command allows you to add a proxy neighbour. Syntax ip6 pneigh -s inet6_addr [LAN|WAN1|WAN2] ip6 pneigh -d inet6_addr [LAN|WAN1|WAN2] ip6 pneigh -a [inet6_addr] [-N LAN|WAN1|WAN2] Syntax Description Parameter Description -s It means to add a proxy neighbour. -d It means to delete a proxy neighbour. -a It means to show proxy neighbour status. inet6_addr Type an IPv6 address LAN|WAN1|WAN2 Specify an interface for the proxy neighbor.
PREFIX/PREFIX-LEN _EXPIRES_ _NEXT-HOP_ I/F METRIC STATE FLAGS -----------------------------------------------------------------------------FE80::/128 0 0 UNICAST U LAN 0 UNICAST U LAN 256 UNICAST U LAN 1024 UNICAST UGA 0 UNICAST UC LAN 256 UNICAST U LAN -1 :: FE80::250:7FFF:FE00:0/128 0 LAN :: FE80::/64 0 FE80::/16 0 FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:100 FF02::1/128 LAN 0 FF02::1 FF00::/8 0 ::/0 UNREACHABLE ! 0 Telnet Command: ip6 ping This command allows you to pin an IPv6 addres
Telnet Command: ip6 tracert This command allows you to trace the routes from the router to the host. Syntax ip6 tracert [IPV6 address/Host] Syntax Description Parameter Description IPV6 address/Host It means to specify the IPv6 address or host for ping.
Status: Connected > Telnet Command: ip6 radvd This command allows you to enable or disable RADVD server. Syntax Ip6 radvd –s [1|0] [lifetime] ip6 radvd –V Syntax Description Parameter Description -s It means to enable or disable the default lifetime of the RADVD server. 1: Enable the RADVD server. 0: Disable the RADVD server. Lifetime It means to set the lifetime. The lifetime associated with the default router in units of seconds. It’s used to control the lifetime of the prefix.
management through Internet. index It means the number (1, 2 and 3) allowed to be configured for IPv6 management. prefix It means to type the IPv6 address which will be used for accessing Internet. prefix-length It means to type a fixed value as the length of the prefix. remove It means to remove (delete) the specified index number with IPv6 settings. flush It means to clear the IPv6 access table. http|telnet|ping|https|ssh These protocols are used for accessing Internet.
% Tx packets = 408, Tx bytes = 32160, Rx packets = 428, Rx bytes = 33636 > ip6 online 1 % WAN 1 online status : % IPv6 WAN1 Disabled % Default Gateway : :: % UpTime : 0:00:00 % Interface : DOWN % IPv6 DNS Server: :: Static % IPv6 DNS Server: :: Static % IPv6 DNS Server: :: Static % Tx packets = 0, Tx bytes = 0, Rx packets = 0, Rx bytes = 0 Telnet Command: ip6 aiccu This command allows you to set IPv6 settings for WAN interface with connection type of AICCU.
ip6 ntp –h ip6 ntp –v ip6 ntp –p [0/1] Syntax Description Parameter Description –h It is used to display the usage of such command. -v It is used to show the NTP state. -p <0/1> It is used to specify NTP server for IPv6. 0 – Auto 1 – First Query IPv6 NTP Server. Example > ip6 ntp -p 1 % Set NTP Priority: IPv6 First Telnet Command: ipf view IPF users to view the version of the IP filter, to view/set the log flag, to view the running IP filter rules.
Syntax ipf set [Options] ipf set [SET_NO] rule [RULE_NO] [Options] Syntax Description Parameter Description Options There are several options provided here, such as -v, -c [SET_NO], -d [SET_NO],… and etc. SET_NO It means to specify the index number (from 1 to 12) of filter set. RULE_NO It means to specify the index number (from 1 to 7) of filter rule set. -v Type “-v” to view the configuration of general set. -c [SET_NO] It means to setup Call Filter, e.g., -c 2.
Log Flag : None Actions for packet not matching any rule: Pass or Block : Pass CodePage : ANSI(1252)-Latin I Max Sessions Limit: 60000 Current Sessions : 0 Mac Bind IP : Non-Strict QOS Class : None APP Enforcement : None URL Content Filter: None Load-Balance policy : Auto-select -------------------------------------------------------------CodePage : ANSI(1252)-Latin I Window size : 65535 Session timeout : 1440 DrayTek Banner : Enable --------------------------------------------------------------Apply IP f
type). 0 - Subnet Address 1 - Single Address 2 - Any Address 3 - Range Address Example: Set Subnet Address => -s u 0 192.168.1.10 255.255.255.0 Set Single Address => -s u 1 192.168.1.10 Set Any Address => -s u 2 Set Range Address => -s u 3 192.168.1.10 192.168.1.15 –d u
| It means to configure destination IP address including address type, start IP address, end IP address and address mask. u – It means “user defined”.2 – Pass if no further match, 3 – Block if no further match. -q It means the classification for QoS. 1– Class 1, 2 – Class 2, 3 – Class 3, 4 – Other -l It means load balance policy. Such function is used for “debug” only. -E It means to enable APP Enforcement. -a It means to specify which APP Enforcement profile will be applied. – Available settings range from 0 ~ 32. “0” means no profile will be applied. -u It means to specify which URL Content Filter profile will be applied.
Status : Enable Comments: xNetBios -> DNS Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup: , , , Direction : LAN -> WAN Source IP : Group1, Destination IP: Group2, Service Type : TCP/UDPGroup1, Fragments : Don't Care Pass or Block : Block Immediately Branch to Other Filter Set: None Max Sessions Limit : 32000 Current Sessions : 0 Mac Bind IP : Non-Strict Qos Class : None APP Enforcement : None URL Content Filter : None Load-Balance policy : Auto-select Log : Disable ----------------------------------
-b It means to show all of IP sessions state. - i [IP address] It means to specify IP address (e.g,, -i 192.168.2.55). -p[value] It means to type a port number (e.g., -p 1024). Available settings are 0 ~ 65535. -t [value] It means to specify a protocol (e.g., -t tcp). Available settings include: tcp udp icmp Example >ipf flowtrack set -r Refresh the flowstate ok > ipf flowtrack view -f Start to show the flowtrack sessions state: ORIGIN>> 192.168.1.11:59939 -> 8.8.8.8: 53 REPLY >> 8.8.8.8: 53 -> 192.
-h It means to show this usage help. -p It means to show PPP/MP log. -t It means to show all logs saved in the log buffer. -w It means to show WAN log. -x It means to show packet body hex dump. Example > log -w 25:36:25.580 ---->DHCP (WAN-5) Len = 548XID = 0x7880fdd4 Client IP = 0.0.0.0 Your IP = 0.0.0.0 Next server IP = 0.0.0.0 Relay agent IP = 0.0.0.0 25:36:33.580 ---->DHCP (WAN-5) Len = 548XID = 0x7880fdd4 Client IP = 0.0.0.0 Your IP = 0.0.0.0 Next server IP = 0.0.0.0 Relay agent IP = 0.0.0.
Telnet Command: mngt httpport This command allows users to set HTTP port for management. Syntax mngt httpport [Http port] Syntax Description Parameter Description Http port It means to enter the number for HTTP port. The default setting is 80. Example > mngt httpport 80 % Set web server port to 80 done. Telnet Command: mngt httpsport This command allows users to set HTTPS port for management.
Syntax mngt sshport [ssh port] Syntax Description Parameter Description ssh port It means to type the number for SSH port. The default setting is 22. Example > mngt sshport 23 % Set ssh port to 23 done. Telnet Command: mngt ftpserver This command can enable/disable FTP server. Syntax mngt ftpserver [enable] mngt ftpserver [disable] Syntax Description Parameter Description enable It means to activate FTP server function. disable It means to inactivate FTP server function.
clearlog It means to clear the log of ping action. Example > mngt noping off No Ping Packet Out is OFF!! Telnet Command: mngt defenseworm This command can block specified port for passing through the router. Syntax mngt defenseworm [on] mngt defenseworm [off] mngt defenseworm [add port] mngt defenseworm [del port] mngt defenseworm [viewlog] mngt defenseworm [clearlog] Syntax Description Parameter Description on It means to activate the function of defense worm packet out.
Syntax Description Parameter Description status It means to display current setting for your reference. enable It means to allow the system administrators to login from the Internet. disable It means to deny the system administrators to login from the Internet. http/https/ftp/telnet/ssh/t r069 It means to specify one of the servers/protocols for enabling or disabling. on/off on – enable the function. off – disable the function.
-v It means to view current settings. -h It means to get the usage of such command.
Syntax mngt accesslist list mngt accesslist add [index][ip addr][mask] mngt accesslist remove [index] mngt accesslist flush Syntax Description Parameter Description list It can display current setting for your reference. add It means adding a new entry. index It means to specify the number of the entry. ip addr It means to specify an IP address. mask It means to specify the subnet mask for the IP address. remove It means to delete the selected item.
trap community. -T It means to set the trap timeout <0~999>. -V It means to list SNMP setting. Example > mngt snmp -e 1 -g draytek -s DK -m 192.168.1.1 -t trapcom -n 10.20.3.40 -T 88 SNMP Agent Turn on!!! Get Community set to draytek Set Community set to DK Manager Host IP set to 192.168.1.1 Trap Community set to trapcom Notification Host IP set to 10.20.3.40 Trap Timeout set to 88 seconds Telnet Command: msubnet switch This command is used to configure multi-subnet.
2/3/4/5/6 It means LAN interface. 2=LAN2 3=LAN3 4=LAN4 5=LAN5 6=LAN6 IP address Type the private IP address for the specified LAN interface. Example > msubnet addr 2 192.168.5.1 % Set LAN2 subnet IP address done !!! This setting will take effect after rebooting. Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router. Telnet Command: msubnet nmask This command is used to configure net mask address for the specified LAN interface.
3=LAN3 4=LAN4 5=LAN5 6=LAN6 Example > msubnet status 2 % LAN2 Off: 0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0, PPP Start IP: 0.0.0.60 % DHCP server: Off % Dhcp Gateway: 0.0.0.0, Start IP: 0.0.0.10, Pool Count: 50 Telnet Command: msubnet dhcps This command allows you to enable or disable DHCP server for the subnet. Syntax msubnet dhcps [2/3/4/5/6][On/Off] Syntax Description Parameter Description 2/3/4/5/6 It means LAN interface.
6=LAN6 On/Off On – It means the subnet will be configured for NAT usage. Off - It means the subnet will be configured for Routing usage. Example > > msubnet nat 2 off % LAN2 Subnet is for Routing usage! %Note: If you have multiple WAN connections, please be reminded to setup a Load-Balance policy so that packets from this subnet will be forwarded to the right WAN interface! This setting will take effect after rebooting. Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
4=LAN4 5=LAN5 6=LAN6 IP counts Specify a total number of IP address allowed for each LAN interface. The available range is from 0 to 220. Example > msubnet ipcnt 2 15 This setting will take effect after rebooting. Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router. Telnet Command: msubnet talk This command is used to establish a route between two LAN interfaces. Syntax msubnet talk [1/2/3/4/5/6] [1/2/3/4/5/6] [On/Off] Syntax Description Parameter Description 1/2/3/4/5/6 It means LAN interface.
This command is used to configure a starting IP address for DCHP. Syntax msubnet startip [2/3/4/5/6] [Gateway IP] Syntax Description Parameter Description 2/3/4/5/6 It means LAN interface. 2=LAN2 3=LAN3 4=LAN4 5=LAN5 6=LAN6 Gateway IP Type an IP address as the starting IP address for a subnet. Example > msubnet startip 2 192.168.2.90 %Set LAN2 Dhcp Start IP done !!! This setting will take effect after rebooting. Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router. > msubnet pppip ? % msubnet pppip <2/3/4/5/6> % Now: LAN2 192.168.2.250; LAN3 192.168.3.200; LAN4 192.168.4.200; LAN5 192.168.5.200; LAN6 192.168.6.200 Telnet Command: msubnet nodetype This command is used to specify the type for node which is required by DHCP option. Syntax msubnet nodetype [2/3/4/5/6][count] Syntax Description Parameter Description 2/3/4/5/6 It means LAN interface.
Syntax Description Parameter Description 2/3/4/5/6 It means LAN interface. 2=LAN2 3=LAN3 4=LAN4 5=LAN5 6=LAN6 WINS IP Type the IP address as the WINS IP. Example > > msubnet primWINS ? % msubnet primWINS <2/3/4/5/6> % Now: LAN2 0.0.0.0; LAN3 0.0.0.0; LAN4 0.0.0.0; LAN5 0.0.0.0; LAN6 0.0.0.0 > msubnet primWINS 2 192.168.3.5 % Set LAN2 Dhcp Primary WINS IP done !!! > msubnet primWINS ? % msubnet primWINS <2/3/4/5/6> % Now: LAN2 192.168.3.5; LAN3 0.0.0.0; LAN4 0.0.0.0; LAN5 0.0.0.
LAN6 0.0.0.0 Telnet Command: msubnet tftp This command is used to set TFTP server for multi-subnet. Syntax msubnet tftp [2/3/4/5/6] [TFTP server name] Syntax Description Parameter Description 2/3/4/5/6 It means LAN interface. 2=LAN2 3=LAN3 4=LAN4 5=LAN5 6=LAN6 TFTP server name Type a name to indicate the TFTP server.
Example > msubnet mtu LAN1 1492 > msubnet mtu ? Usage: >msubnet mtu : LAN1~LAN6,IP_Routed_Subnet,DMZ : 1000 ~ 1508 (Bytes), default: 1500 (Bytes) e.x: >msubnet mtu LAN1 1492 Current Settings: LAN1 MTU: 1492 (Bytes) LAN2 MTU: 1500 (Bytes) LAN3 MTU: 1500 (Bytes) LAN4 MTU: 1500 (Bytes) LAN5 MTU: 1500 (Bytes) LAN6 MTU: 1500 (Bytes) DMZ MTU: 1500 (Bytes) IP Routed Subnet MTU: 1500 (Bytes) Telnet Command: object ip obj This command is used to create an IP object profile.
INTERFACE=3, means WAN Example: object ip obj 8 -i 0 -s INVERT It means to set invert seletion for the object profile. INVERT=0, means disableing the function. INVERT=1, means enabling the function. Example: object ip obj 3 -s 1 -a TYPE It means to set the address type and IP for the IP object profile.
Example: object ip grp 8 -n bruce -i INTERFACE It means to define an interface for the IP group. INTERFACE=0, means any INTERFACE=1, means LAN INTERFACE=2, means WAN Example: object ip grp 3 -i 0 -a IP_OBJ_INDEX It means to specify IP object profiles for the group profile. Example: :object ip grp 3 -a 1 2 3 4 5 The IP object profiles with index number 1,2,3,4 and 5 will be group under such profile.
Telnet Command: object ipv6 obj This comman is used to create an IP object profile. Syntax object ip obj setdefault object ip obj INDEX -v object ip obj INDEX -n NAME object ip obj INDEX -i INTERFACE object ip obj INDEX -s INVERT object ip obj INDEX -a TYPE [START_IP] [END/MASK_IP] Syntax Description Parameter Description setdefault It means to return to default settings for all profiles. INDEX It means the index number of the specified object profile.
Interface:[Any] Address type:[single] Start ip address:[192.168.1.45] End/Mask ip address:[0.0.0.0] Invert Selection:[0] Telnet Command: object ipv6 grp This command is used to integrate several IP objects under an IP group profile. Syntax object ip grp setdefault object ip grp INDEX -v object ip grp INDEX -n NAME object ip grp INDEX -i INTERFACE object ip grp INDEX -a IP_OBJ_INDEX Syntax Description Parameter Description setdefault It means to return to default settings for all profiles.
[7:][0] > object ip grp 2 -i 1 > object ip grp 2 -a 1 2 IP Group Profile 2 Name :[First] Interface:[Lan] Included ip object index: [0:][1] [1:][2] [2:][0] [3:][0] [4:][0] [5:][0] [6:][0] [7:][0] Telnet Command: object service obj This command is used to create service object profile.
same, it indicates one port; when the starting port and ending port values are different, it indicates a range for the port and available for this service type. 1=not equal(!=), when the starting port and ending port values are the same, it indicates all the ports except the port defined here; when the starting port and ending port values are different, it indicates that all the ports except the range defined here are available for this service type.
NAME: Type a name with less than 15 characters. Example: object service grp 8 -n bruce -a SER_OBJ_INDEX It means to specify service object profiles for the group profile. Example: :object service grp 3 -a 1 2 3 4 5 The service object profiles with index number 1,2,3,4 and 5 will be group under such profile.
PAGE: type the page number. show It means to show the contents for all of the profiles. INDEX It means the index number of the specified keyword profile. -v It means to view the information of the specified keyword profile. -n NAME It means to define a name for the keyword profile. NAME: Type a name with less than 15 characters. -a CONTENTS It means to set the contents for the keyword profile.
-d It means to disable the specific CATEGORY or FILE_EXTENSION CATEGORY|FILE_EXTENSION CATEGORY: Image, Video, Audio, Java, ActiveX, Compression, Executation Example: object fe obj 1 -e Image FILE_EXTENSION: ".bmp", ".dib", ".gif", ".jpeg", ".jpg", ".jpg2", ".jp2", ".pct", ".pcx", ".pic", ".pict", ".png", ".tif", ".tiff", ".asf", ".avi", ".mov", ".mpe", ".mpeg", ".mpg", ".mp4", ".qt", ".rm", ".wmv", ".3gp", ".3gpp", ".3gpp2", ".3g2", ".aac", ".aiff", ".au", ".mp3", ".m4a", ".m4p", ".ogg", ".ra", ".
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Executation category: [ ].bas [ ].bat [ ].com [ ].exe [ ].inf [ ].pif [ ].reg [ ].scr Telnet Command: port This command allows users to set the speed for specific port of the router. Syntax port [1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, wan2, all] [AN, 100F, 100H, 10F, 10H, status] port status port sniff [on,off,port,txrx,restart,status] port 802.
Parameter Description [ |…] The available commands with parameters are listed below. […] means that you can type in several commands in one line. -t It means “TCP” protocol. : Type a number to set the TCP session timeout. -u It means “UDP” protocol. : Type a number to set the UDP session timeout. -i It means “IGMP” protocol. : Type a number to set the IGMP session timeout. -w It means “TCP WWW” protocol.
-v Show PPA_WAN_Table and PPA_LAN_Table for reference. -c Clean all settings. -x Show hardware acceleration information. -k Clean the PPA table. ppa n – used in QoS or specific host -l Specify an index number of rule profile for QoS mode. -h Type an IP address for Specific Host mode. -s Specify a starting port number for Specific Host mode.
conn[1] : none conn[2] : none conn[3] : none LPD_data_total=0 usblp_ptr=0 UsbPrintReady=0, UsbIsPrinting=0 Telnet Command: qos setup This command allows user to set general settings for QoS. Syntax qos setup [- | ... ] Syntax Description Parameter Description [ |…] The available commands with parameters are listed below. […] means that you can type in several commands in one line. -h Type it to display the usage of this command.
WAN1 QOS mode is both Wan 1 is XDSL model ,don,t need to set up Wan 1 is XDSL model ,don,t need to set up WAN1 class 3 ratio set to 20 WAN1 udp bandwidth control set to enable WAN1 udp bandwidth limit ratio set to 50 WAN1 Outbound TCP ACK Prioritizel set to enable QoS WAN1 set complete; restart QoS > Telnet Command: qos class This command allows user to set QoS class. Syntax qos class -c [no] –[a|e|d] [no][- | ...
addr1:subnet – It means the subnet address with start IP address. Please type the subnet and the IP address, for example, “-l 172.16.3.9:255.255.0.0”.0 any – It means Any address. Simple type “-l” to specify any address for this command. -p Specify the ID. -s Specify the service type by typing the number. The available types are listed as below: 1:ANY 2:DNS 3:FTP 4:GRE 5:H.
Example > qos type -a draytek -t 6 -p 510:1330 service name set service type set Port type set to Service Port set > to draytek to 6:TCP Range to 510 ~ 1330 Telnet Command: quit This command can exit the telnet command screen. Telnet Command: show lan This command displays current status of LAN IP address settings. Example > show lan The LAN settings: ip mask dhcp star_ip pool gateway ----------------------------------------------------------------------------[V]LAN1 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0 [V] 192.
Telnet Command: show dmz This command displays current status of DMZ host. Example > show dmz % WAN1 DMZ mapping status: Index Status WAN1 aux IP Private IP ---------------------------------------------------1 Disable 172.16.3.221 2 Disable 192.168.1.
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 --- MORE --- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 0.0.0.0 0 0.0.0.0 0 0.0.0.0 0 0.0.0.0 0 0.0.0.0 0 0.0.0.0 0 0.0.0.0 0 0.0.0.0 0 0.0.0.0 ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bar': Next Page] Telnet Command: show portmap This command displays the table of NAT Active Sessions.
Telnet Command: show status This command displays current status of LAN and WAN connections. Example > show status System Uptime:20:36:35 LAN Status Primary DNS:8.8.8.8 IP Address:192.168.1.1 Secondary DNS:8.8.4.4 Tx Rate:12923 Rx Rate:8152 WAN 1 Status: Disconnected Enable:Yes Line:xDSL Name:tcom Mode:Static IP Up Time:0:00:00 IP:172.16.3.221 GW IP:172.16.3.
Telnet Command: show statistic This command displays statistics for WAN interface. Syntax show statistic show statistic reset [interface] Syntax Description Parameter Description reset It means to reset the transmitted/received bytes to Zero. interface It means to specify WAN1 ~WAN5 (including multi-PVC) interface for displaying related statistics.
Telnet Command: srv dhcp badip This command is reserved for future using. Syntax srv dhcp badip Example > srv dhcp badip > Telnet Command: srv dhcp public This command allows users to configure DHCP server for second subnet.
Telnet Command: srv dhcp dns1 This command allows users to set Primary IP Address for DNS Server in LAN. Syntax srv dhcp dns1 [?] srv dhcp dns1 [DNS IP address] Syntax Description Parameter Description ? It means to display current IP address of DNS 1 for the DHCP server. DNS IP address It means the IP address that you want to use as DNS1. Note: The IP Routed Subnet DNS must be the same as NAT Subnet DNS). Example > srv dhcp dns1 168.95.1.1 % srv dhcp dns1 % Now: 168.95.1.
Telnet Command: srv dhcp frcdnsmanl This command can force the router to invoke DNS Server IP address. Syntax srv dhcp frcdnsmanl [on] srv dhcp frcdnsmanl [off] Syntax Description Parameter Description ? It means to display the current status. on It means to use manual setting for DNS setting. Off It means to use auto settings acquired from ISP.
Telnet Command: srv dhcp ipcnt This command allows users to specify IP counts for DHCP server. Syntax srv dhcp ipcnt [?] srv dhcp ipcnt [IP counts] Syntax Description Parameter Description ? It means to display current used IP count number. IP counts It means the number that you have to specify for the DHCP server. Example > srv dhcp ipcnt ? % srv dhcp ipcnt % Now: 150 Telnet Command: srv dhcp off This function allows users to turn off DHCP server.
Telnet Command: srv dhcp startip Syntax srv dhcp startip [?] srv dhcp startip [IP address] Syntax Description Parameter Description ? It means to display current used start IP address. IP address It means the IP address that you can specify for the DHCP server as the starting point. Example > srv dhcp startip 192.168.1.53 This setting will take effect after rebooting. Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
Telnet Command: srv dhcp leasetime This command can set the lease time for the DHCP server. Syntax srv dhcp leasetime [?] srv dhcp leasetime [Lease Time (sec)] Syntax Description Parameter Description ? It means to display current leasetime used for the DHCP server. Lease Time (sec) It means the lease time that DHCP server can use. The unit is second. Example > srv dhcp leasetime ? % srv dhcp leasetime
Telnet Command: srv dhcp primWINS This command can set the primary IP address for the DHCP server. Syntax srv dhcp primWINS [WINS IP address] srv dhcp primWINS clear Syntax Description Parameter Description WINS IP address It means the IP address of primary WINS server. clear It means to remove the IP address settings of primary WINS server. Example > srv dhcp primWINS 192.168.1.88 > srv dhcp primWINS ? %% srv dhcp primWINS %% srv dhcp primWINS clear % Now: 192.168.1.
Telnet Command: srv dhcp expired_RecycleIP This command can set the time to check if the IP address can be assigned again by DHCP server or not. Syntax srv dhcp expRecycleIP Syntax Description Parameter Description sec time It means to set the time (5~300 seconds) for checking if the IP can be assigned again or not. Example Vigor> srv dhcp expRecycleIP 250 % DHCP expired_RecycleIP = 250 Telnet Command: srv dhcp tftp This command can set the TFTP server as the DHCP server.
Parameter Description -h It means to display usage of this command. -l It means to display all the user defined DHCP options. -d[idx] It means to delete the option number by specifying its index number. -e [1 or 0] It means to enable/disable custom option feature. 1:enable 0:disable -c It means to set option number. Available number ranges from 0 to 255. -v It means to set option number by typing string. -a It means to set the option value by specifying the IP address.
Telnet Command: srv nat dmz This command allows users to set DMZ host. Before using this command, please set WAN IP Alias first. Syntax srv nat dmz n m [- | … ] Syntax Description Parameter Description n It means to map selected WAN IP to certain host. 1: wan1 2: wan2 m It means the index number of the DMZ host. Default setting is “1” (WAN 1). It is only available for Static IP mode. If you use other mode, you can set 1 ~ 8 in this field.
status It means to display current status for checking. Example > srv nat ipsecpass status %% Status: IPsec ESP pass-thru and IKE src_port:500 preservation is OFF. Telnet Command: srv nat openport This command allows users to set open port settings for NAT server. Syntax srv nat openport n m [- | … ] Syntax Description Parameter Description n It means the index number for the profiles. The range is from 1 to 20. m It means to specify the sub-item number for this profile.
%% Status: Enable %% Comment: games %% Private IP address: 192.168.1.100 Index Protocal Start Port End Port ***************************************************************** 1. TCP 23 83 %% Status: Disable %% Comment: %% Private IP address: 0.0.0.0 Index Protocal Start Port End Port ***************************************************************** %% Status: Disable %% Comment: %% Private IP address: 0.0.0.
table It means to display Port Redirection Configuration Table. Example > srv nat portmap add 1 game tcp 80 192.168.1.
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 --- MORE ----- ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page] Telnet Command: srv nat showall This command allows users to view a summary of NAT port redirection setting, open port and DMZ settings.
traffic [on/off/status/tx/rx] cmd It means to send command to the client. acc It means to set the client authentication account and password. traffic [on/off/status/tx/rx] It means to turn on/off or display the data transmission from the client. Example > switch -i 1 traffic on External Device NO. 1 traffic statistic function is enable Telnet Command: switch on This command is used to turn on the auto discovery for external devices.
Example > switch clear 1 Switch Data clear successful > switch clear -f Switch Data clear successful Telnet Command: switch query This command is used to enable or disable the switch query. Example > switch query on Extern Device status query is Enable > switch query off Extern Device status query is Disable Telnet Command: sys admin This command is used for RD engineer to access into test mode of Vigor router.
Local User has enabled! > sys adminuser LDAP 1 LDAP has enabled! >> sys adminuser edit 1 carrie test123 Updated! >> sys adminuser view 1 Index:1 User Name:carrie User Password:test123 Telnet Command: sys bonjour This command is used to disable/enable and configure the Bonjour service. Syntax sys bonjour [- | ... ] Syntax Description Parameter Description -e It is used to disable/enable bonjour service (0: disable, 1: enable).
Telnet Command: sys cfg This command reset the router with factory default settings. When a user types this command, all the configuration will be reset to default setting. Syntax sys cfg default sys cfg status Syntax Description Parameter Description default It means to reset current settings with default values. status It means to display current profile version and status. Example > sys cfg status Profile version: 3.0.
Telnet Command: sys domainname This command can set and remove the domain name of the system when DHCP mode is selected for WAN. Syntax sys domainname [wan1/wan2] [Domain Name Suffix] sys domainname [wan1/wan2] clear Syntax Description Parameter Description wan1/wan2 It means to specify WAN interface for assigning a name for it. Domain Name Suffix It means the name for the domain of the system. The maximum number of characters that you can set is 40.
Interface 7 Ethernet: Status: DOWN IP Address: 0.0.0.0 MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-05 Interface 8 Ethernet: Status: DOWN IP Address: 0.0.0.0 MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-06 Netmask: 0x00000000 Netmask: 0x00000000 Interface 9 Ethernet: Status: DOWN IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Netmask: 0x00000000 MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-07 --- MORE --- ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page] --> Telnet Command: sys name This command can set and remove the name for the router when DHCP mode is selected for WAN.
Telnet Command: sys passwd This command allows users to set password for the administrator. sys passwd [ASCII string] Syntax Description Parameter Description ASCII string It means the password for administrator. The maximum character that you can set is 23. Example > sys passwd admin123 > Telnet Command: sys reboot This command allows users to restart the router immediately.
> Telnet Command: sys tftpd This command can turn on TFTP server for upgrading the firmware. Example > sys tftpd % TFTP server enabled !!! Telnet Command: sys cc This command can display current country code and wireless region of this device. Example > sys cc Country Code : 0x 0 [International] Wireless Region Code: 0x30 > Telnet Command: sys version This command can display current version for the system. Example > sys version Router Model: Vigor2862Vn+ Version: 3.7.4.1 English Profile version: 3.0.
Dynamic memory: 13107200B; 4573168B used; 190480B/0B in level 1/2 cache. FLOWTRACK Memory Status # of free = 12000 # of maximum = 0 # of flowstate = 12000 # of lost by siganture = 0 # of lost by list = 0 Telnet Command: sys pollbuf This command can turn on or turn off polling buffer for the router. Syntax sys pollbuf [on] sys pollbuf [off] Syntax Description Parameter Description on It means to turn on pulling buffer. off It means to turn off pulling buffer.
Telnet Command: sys tr069 This command can set CPE settings for applying in VigorACS. Syntax sys tr069 get [parm] [option] sys tr069 set [parm] [value] sys tr069 getnoti [parm] sys tr069 setnoti [parm] [value] sys tr069 log sys tr069 debug [on/off] sys tr069 save sys tr069 inform [event code] sys tr069 port [port num] sys tr069 cert_auth [on/off] Syntax Description Parameter Description get [parm] [option] It means to get parameters for tr-069.
Total content length of parameter is 915 InternetGatewayDevice.LANDeviceNumberOfEntries InternetGatewayDevice.WANDeviceNumberOfEntries InternetGatewayDevice.DeviceInfo. InternetGatewayDevice.ManagementServer. InternetGatewayDevice.Time. InternetGatewayDevice.Layer3Forwarding. InternetGatewayDevice.LANDevice. InternetGatewayDevice.WANDevice. InternetGatewayDevice.Services. InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_InternetAcc. InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_LAN. InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_NAT.
Telnet Command: sys license This command can process the system license. Syntax sys license licmsg sys license licauth sys license regser sys license licera sys license licifno sys license lic_wiz [set/reg/qry] sys license dev_chg sys license dev_key Syntax Description Parameter Description licmsg It means to display license message. licauth It means the license authentication time setting. regser It means the license register server setting. licera It means to erase license setting.
Telnet Command: sys diag_log This command is used for RD debug. Syntax sys diag_log [status| enable| disable| flush| lineno [w] | level [x] | feature [on|off] [y]| log] Syntax Description Parameter Description status It means to show the status of diagnostic log. enable It means to enable the function of diag_log. disable It means to disenable the function of diag_log. flush It means the flush log buffer. lineno [w] It means the total lines for displaying message.
0:00:03 [DSL] modem code: [05-04-08-00-00-06] 0:00:05 [DSL] Status was switched: FirmwareRequest(1) to firmwareReady(3) 0:00:05 [DSL] Status was switched: firmwareReady(3) to Init(5) 0:00:05 [DSL] >> nXtseA=0d, nXtseB=00, nXtseV=07, nFwFeatures=5 0:00:05 [DSL] >> nHsToneGroupMode=0, nHsToneGroup=106, nToneSet=43, nCamState =2 0:00:05 [DSL] Line state has changed: 000000FF -> 00000100 0:00:05 [DSL] Line state has changed: 00000100 -> 00000200 0:00:05 [DSL] Status was switched: Init(5) to Train(6) Telnet Com
The tmpvirtual server index >>0<< PortMapLeaseDuration >>0<<, PortMapEnabled >>0<< Ftp Example [MICROSOFT] ((1)) InternalClient >>0.0.0.0<<, RemoteHost >>0.0.0.
Vigor> upnp subscribe >>>> (1) serviceType urn:schemas-microsoft-com:service:OSInfo:1 ----- Subscribtion1 ------sid = 7a2bbdd0-0047-4fc8-b870-4597b34da7fb eventKey =1, ToSendEventKey = 1 expireTime =6926 active =1 DeliveryURLs = >>>> (2) serviceType urn:schemas-upnp-org:service:WANCommonInterfaceConfig:1 ----- Subscribtion1 ------sid = d9cd47a5-d9c9-4d3d-8043-d03a82f27983 eventKey =1, ToSendEventKey = 1 . . .
Telnet Command: upnp wan This command is used to specify WAN interface to apply UPnP. Syntax upnp wan [n] Syntax Description Parameter Description n It means to specify WAN interface to apply UPnP. n=0, it means to auto-select WAN interface. n=1, WAN1 n=2, WAN2 ………. Example > upnp wan 1 use wan1 now. Telnet Command: usb list This command is use to display the information about the brand name and model name of the USB modems which are supported by Vigor router.
- MORE - ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page] - Telnet Command: vigbrg on This command can make the router to be regarded as a modem but not a router. Example > vigbrg on %Enable Vigor Bridge Function! Telnet Command: vigbrg off This command can disable vigor bridge function. Example > vigbrg off %Disable Vigor Bridge Function! Telnet Command: vigbrg status This command can show whether the Vigor Bridge Function is enabled or disabled.
Telnet Command: vigbrg cfgip This command allows users to transfer a bridge modem into ADSL router by accessing into and adjusting specified IP address. Users can access into Web UI of the router to manage the router through the IP address configured here. Syntax vigbrg cfgip [IP Address] Syntax Description Parameter Description IP Address It means to type an IP address for users to manage the router. Example > > % % vigbrg cfgip 192.168.1.15 vigbrg cfgip ? Vigor Bridge Config IP, Now: 192.168.1.
1: Subnet 1, 2: Subnet 2, ...etc. -b[Bridge mode] It means to enable / disable Bridge mode. 0: OFF 1: ON Example > fullbrg status ? Show gConfig setting of full bridge WAN 1 full bridge to LAN 1, mode=OFF. WAN 2 full bridge to LAN 1, mode=OFF. WAN 5 full bridge to LAN 1, mode=OFF. WAN 6 full bridge to LAN 1, mode=OFF. WAN 7 full bridge to LAN 1, mode=OFF. WAN 8 full bridge to LAN 1, mode=OFF. WAN 9 full bridge to LAN 1, mode=OFF. WAN10 full bridge to LAN 1, mode=OFF.
Call-ID: PbU-25312@192.168.1.1 CSeq: 1 INVITE Contact: Max-Forwards: 70 supported: 100rel, replaces User-Agent: DrayTek UA-1.2.3 DrayTek Vigor2910 Allow: INVITE, ACK, CANCEL, OPTIONS, BYE, INFO, REFER, NOTIFY, PRACK Content-Type: application/sdp Content-Length: 264 v=0 o=change_me 5972727 56415 IN IP4 192.168.1.1 Telnet Command: voip dialplan This command allows users to set phone book settings.
- The available commands with parameters are listed below. -d Specify the speed dial number. -c Contact SIP URL l(max. 59 characters) -n Contact name (max. 23 characters) -a Enable/disable the specify entry. -m Specify backup number mode. 0 – none 2 - PSTN -b Spedify the backup number. -o Specify the dial out account. 0 – default 1 - acc1, 2 - acc2... ~ 12:=acc12 -z Enable/disable ZRTP/SRTP VoIP security.
enable/disable Enable or disable the local calls.
voip dsp setDtmfCidlevel –h [value] voip dsp setDtmfCidlevel –r 0 voip dsp cidplusdigit [1/0] [channel] [value] Syntax Description Parameter Description voip dsp countrytone [channel] [value] This command allows users to set the region for the tone settings. Different regions usually need different tone settings. Channel – 1 or 2.
channel Adjust the volume of microphone by entering number from 1- 10 for FXS 1 or FXS 2. 1 – FXS 1 2 – FXS 2 value/(1~10) The larger the number is, the louder the volume will be. voip dsp spkgain channel Adjust the volume of speaker by entering number from 1- 10 for FXS 1 or FXS 2. 1 – FXS 1 2 – FXS 2 value/(1~10) The larger the number is, the louder the volume will be. voip dsp jb port Set the size of jitter buffer. Available settings are 0 (FXS1) and 1 (FXS2).
0 map to 0dB 1 map to -0.3dB .... 100 map to -30dB voip dsp cwtonepwr ch Set the call waiting tone power level. 1 – FXS 1 2 – FXS 2. value 1 ~ 30, in -1 dB increments, with 1 corresponding to 8 dBm. voip dsp pstnringfxs 1|2 Enable or disable PSTN ring on FXS 1/FXS 2. 1 meansFXS1; 2 means FXS2. on|off On means enable; off means disable. voip dsp relaydbounce on|off on: Enable relay filter noise. But it maybe ignore the caller-id!!! off: Disable relay filter noise.
6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 12: 14: 15: 17: 18: 20: 21: 22: 23: 25: 37: 61: "Holland" "Finland" "Denmark" "UK" "Australia" "Italy" "Red_China" "Singapore" "Spain" "Portugal" "Poland" "Czech" "Hungary" "Slovenia" "Slovakia" "Brasil" "US" voip dsp setfxoringl value It is used to configure detection ring voltage threshold to apply to FXO.
voip dsp countrytone [channel][value] [channel]: 1-2 [value]: ( [2] UK, [3] USA, [4] Denmark, [5] Italy, [6] Germany, [7] Netherland s, [8] Portugal, [9] Sweden, [10] Australia, [11] Slovenia, [12] Czech, [13] Slovakia, [14] Hungary, [15] Switzerland , [16] France , [17] Malta) ============ Channel=1 =================== current country tone: user defined ----------- ( Dial tone ) -------------------Feq1=425, Feq2=0, OneOn=0, Off=0, TwoOn=0, TwoOff=0 ----------- ( Ringing tone ) ----------------Feq1=425, Feq
(vad); 1 means to Enable the function of Voice Active Detector (vad). One – 0 means to Disable the function of single codec; 1 means to Enable the function of single codec. voip rtp dtmf [index] [mode | payloadtype][value] Set the DTMF mode and Payload type for DTMF. Index – SIP account index number. Available number, 1 ~ 12. Mode – Four options to be selected. 0. Inband 1. Outband 2. SIP INFO (cisco) 3. SIP INFO (nortel) Payloadtype – Available settings 96~127.
voip sip misc[- | ... ] voip sip nat [- | ... ] Syntax Description Parameter Description voip sip acc - Allows users to set SIP account. n n = 1 to 12 It means the index number of the VoIP settings. -P [profile] It means the name of the account profile (maximum 11 characters). -r [reg mode] Set registration mode for SIP account.
3 - nortel -F [mode] Set call forwarding mode. 0 – disable 1 – always 2 – busy 3 - no answer 4 - busy or no answer -u [url] Set SIP URL for call forwarding (max. 63 characters). -t [sec] Set call forwarding timer. For example, voip sip acc 1 –t 30 -g [port] Set the ring port for incoming call. For example, Port - r1 means FXS1; r2 means FXS2. -z [pattern] Set account ring pattern (1 ~ 6). -i [enable] Remove all bindings while they are un-registered. 0 means Disable; and 1 means Enable.
1 - enable -s [id] Indicate DND schedule. Id - s1, s2, s3, s4 (max. 4 schedule) -h [enable] Enable / disable the function of calling line identification restriction (CLIR). 0 – disable 1 - enable -u [mode] Set CLIR mode. 0 - means “draft-ietf-sip-privacy” 1 – means “rfc 3323/3325)” -z [enable] Enable / disable playing dial tone when registered on sip server. 0 – disable 1 - enable -n [enable] Enable / disable session timer.
1 - Show SIP header "User-Agent". 2 - Use default "User-Agent" value. 3 - Use user-defined "User-Agent" value. -u UAValue For every SIP user agent identifies itself with a string, this command allows you to set the value (e.g, IP address, phone number, e-mail address) of User-Agent. The length of the string must be less than 64 characters. -D [disable] Disable VoIP Service. 1 – disable VoIP service. 0 – enable VoIP service.
Telnet Command: voip secure This command allows users to enable or disable secure phone feature, and SAS voice prompt. Syntax voip secure general [- | ... ] Syntax Description Parameter Description voip secure general -e Enable / disable secure phone feature. 0 - disable 1 - enable voip secure general -p Enable /disable SAS voice prompt.
aggressive It means the chosen DH group for aggressive mode pfs It means “perfect forward secrete”. on/off It means to turn on or off the PFS function. phase1 It means phase 1 of IKE. lifetime It means the lifetime value (in second) for phase 1 and phase 2. phase2 It means phase 2 of IKE. Example > VPN l2lset 1 peerid 10226 Telnet Command: vpn l2lDrop This command allows users to terminate current LAN to LAN VPN connection.
Profile Name: ??? Status: Deactive Mobile OTP: Disabled Password: Idle Timeout: 300 sec > vpn dinset 1 on % set profile active > % > > vpn dinset 1 motp on Enable Mobile OTP mode!> vpn dinset 1 pin_secret 1234 e759bb6f0e94c7ab4fe6 vpn dinset 1 Dial-in profile index 1 Profile Name: ??? Status: Active Mobile OTP: Enabled PIN: 1234 Secret: e759bb6f0e94c7ab4fe6 Idle Timeout: 300 sec Telnet Command: vpn subnet This command allows users to specify a subnet selection for the specified remote dial-in VPN profile
> vpn subnet 1 2 > Telnet Command: vpn setup This command allows users to setup VPN for different types.
255.255.255.0 For Dial-In It means the index number of the profile. It means the name of the profile. It means the IP address allowed to dial in. It means the user and the password required for the PPTP/L2TP connection. It means the value of IPsec Pre-Shared Key. It means the remote network IP and the mask. e.g., vpn setup 1 name1 dialin 1.2.3.4 vigor 1234 abc 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 Example > vpn setup 1 name1 dialin 1.2.3.
thr It means the way that VPN connection passes through. Available settings are wlf, wlo, w2f, and w2o. w1f – WAN1 First. w1o – WAN1 Only. w2f – WAN2 First. w2o – WAN2 Only. nnpkt It means the NetBios Naming Packet. on – Enable the function to pass the packet. off – Disable the function to block the packet. dir It means the call direction. Available settings are b, o and i. b – Both o – Dial-Out i – Dial-In. idle=[value] It means Always on and Idle Time out.
“ometh=espd/espda/” means ESP DES without/with Authentication. “ometh=esp3/esp3a/” means ESP 3DES without/with Authentication. “ometh=espa/espaa” means ESP AES without/with Authentication. sch It means Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup. sch=1,3,5,7 Set schedule 1->3->5->7 rcallb It means Require Remote to Callback. “rcallb=on/off” means to enable/disable Set Require Remote to Callback. ikeid It means IKE Local ID. “ikeid=vigor” means Set Local ID = vigor.
rip It means RIP Direction. “rip=d” means to set RIP Direction as “Disable”. “rip=t” means to set RIP Direction as “TX”. “rip=r” means to set RIP Direction as “RX”. “rip=b” means to set RIP Direction as “Both”. mode It means the option of “From first subnet to remote network, you have to do”. “mode=r” means to set Route mode. “mode=n” means to set NAT mode. droute It means to Change default route to this VPN tunnel ( Only single WAN supports this). droute=on/off means to enable/disable the function.
vpn list all vpn list com vpn listout vpn list in vpn listnet Syntax Description Parameter Description all It means to list configuration of the specified profile. com It means to list common settings of the specified profile. out It means to list dial-out settings of the specified profile. in It means to list dial-in settings of the specified profile. net It means to list Network Settings of the specified profile.
% % % % % % > Profile Name : Profile Status : Netbios Naming Packet : Call Direction : Idle Timeout : PING to keep alive : ??? Disable Pass Both 300 off Telnet Command: vpn remote This command allows users to enable or disable PPTP/IPSec/L2TP VPN service. Syntax vpn remote [PPTP/IPSec/L2TP] [on/off] Syntax Description Parameter Description PPTP/IPSec/L2TP There are four types to be selected. on/off on – enable VPN remote setting. off – disable VPN remote setting.
This command allows users to enable or disable NetBios for Remote Access User Accounts or LAN-to-LAN Profile. Syntax vpn NetBios set Syntax Description Parameter Description H2l means Remote Access User Accounts. L2l means LAN-to-LAN Profile. Specify which one will be applied by NetBios. The index number of the profile. Pass – Have an inquiry for data transmission between the hosts located on both sides of VPN Tunnel while connecting.
L2TP over IPSec – 1 ~ 1361 Example >vpn mss set 1 1400 % VPN TCP maximum segment size (MSS) : PPTP = 1400 L2TP = 1360 IPSec = 1360 L2TP over IPSec = 1360 >vpn mss show VPN TCP maximum segment size (MSS) : PPTP = 1400 L2TP = 1360 IPSec = 1360 L2TP over IPSec = 1360 Telnet Command: vpn ike This command is used to display IKE memory status and leakage list.
> vpn Multicast set L2l 1 Pass % Lan to Lan Profile Index [1] : % Status Block/Pass: [PASS] Telnet Command: vpn pass2nd This command allows users to determine if the packets coming from the second subnet passing through current used VPN tunnel. Syntax vpn pass2nd[on] vpn pass2nd [off] Syntax Description Parameter Description on/off on – the packets can pass through NAT. off – the packets cannot pass through NAT.
Syntax Description Parameter Description Type a number to represent the physical interface. For Vigor130, the number is 1 (which means WAN1). It means the number of PPP LCP MRU. The available range is from 1400 to 1600. Example >wan ppp_mru 1 ? % Now: 1492 > wan ppp_mru 1 1490 > > wan ppp_mru 1 ? % Now: 1490 > wan ppp_mru 1 1492 > wan ppp_mru 1 ? % Now: 1492 Telnet Command: wan mtu / wan mtu2 This command allows users to adjust the size of MTU for WAN1/WAN2.
Syntax Description Parameter Description on/off It means to enable or disable DF. Example > wan DF_check on %DF bit check enable! > wan DF_check off %DF bit check disable (reset DF bit)! Telnet Command: wan disable This command allows you to disable WAN connection. Example > wan disable WAN %WAN disabled. Telnet Command: wan enable This command allows you to disable wan connection. Example > wan enable WAN %WAN1 enabled.
Example > wan status WAN1: Offline, stall=N Mode: ---, Up Time=00:00:00 IP=---, GW IP=--TX Packets=0, TX Rate(Bps)=0, RX Packets=0, RX Rate(Bps)=0 Primary DNS=0.0.0.0, Secondary DNS=0.0.0.
on: None. off: PAP or CHAP. backup_wait Set waiting time after boot if USB WAN is in backup mode. This waiting time is reserved for the dial of main WANs so that the backup USB WAN will not go up first. Available setting is from 1 to 255. Unit is second. pipe It is for RD debug only. Please don’t use it without our advice. wakeup [on/off] It is for RD debug only. Please don’t use it without our advice. vid Set VID of VID/PID match to bind the USB modem to specify WAN interface.
Actual Data Rate: 0 0 SNR: 0 0 0.1dB > wan vdsl fbk_mode vdsl_only Set VDSL fallback mode to VDSL ONLY Reboot system to take effect > Kb/s Telnet Command: wan lte This command allows you to configure LTE WAN (for L model only).
-n : Set SMS quota. The avaible number is between 1 and 1000000. -s <0/1>: Set whether to stop sending SMS after SMS quota exceeded. (0: no 1: yes) read Display information of an SMS in the LTE SIM card by specifying the index number. Use "all" to display all. reboot Set settings of Reboot on SMS Message function. | ... The available commands with parameters are listed below. [...] means that you can type in several commands in one line.
wms This command is for RD debug only. We use it to test new USB modems. Please don't use it without our advice. Example > wan lte band Access technology : LTE Access band information : E-UTRA Op Band 3 Interfere with 2.4G WLAN : NO Active channel: 1725 >wan lte stus Status: Operational.
Target_gw Set whether to use gateway as ping target. (1: yes 0: no) Note that USB WAN (PPP mode) cannot support PING gateway ip addr It means the IP address used for detection. Type an IP address in this field. ttl It means to set the ping TTL value (work as trace route) If you do not set any value for ttl here or just type 0 here, the system will use default setting (255) as the ttl value. interval [interval] Set the interval between each ping operation. Available setting is between 1 and 3600.
Telnet Command: wan lb This command allows you to Enable/Disable for each WAN to join auto load balance member. Syntax wan lb [wan1/wan2/…] on wan lb [wan1/wan2/…] off wan lb status Syntax Description Parameter Description wan1/wan2 Specify which WAN will be applied with load balance. on Make WAN interface as the member of load balance. off Cancel WAN interface as the member of load balance. status Show the current status.
-1: No need to add tag number. 1-4095: Available setting numbers used as tagged number. service type It means to specify the service type for VLAN. 0: Normal. 1: IGMP. vlan priority It means to specify the priority for the VALN setting. Range is from 0 to 7. px It means LAN port. Available setting number is from 2 to 4. Port number 1 is locked for NAT usage. keeptag It means Multi-VLAN packets will keep their VLAN headers to LAN.
% Channel 5 uplink ifno: 3 % Channel 6 uplink ifno: 3 % Channel 7 uplink ifno: 3 > Telnet Command: wan vlan This command allows you to configure the VLAN tag of WAN1 or WAN2. Syntax wan vlan wan [#] tag [value] wan vlan wan [#] [enable/disable] wan vlan stat Syntax Description Parameter Description wan [#] Specify which WAN interface will be tagged. tag [value] Type a number for tagging on WAN interface. enable/disable Enable: Specified WAN interface will be tagged.
rdate Specify the WAN budget refresh time. day – Available settings are from 1 to 30. hour – Available settings are from 1 to 23. E.g.
count: Available settings are 1 ~ 10. Default value is 3. Example > wan detect_mtu -w 2 -i 8.8.8.8 -s 1500 -d 30 -c 10 detecting mtu size:1500!!! mtu size:1470!!! Telnet Command: wan detect_mtu6 This command allows you to run a WAN MTU Discovery. The user can specify an IPv6 target to ping and find the suitable MTU size of the WAN interface.
0:skip 1:click 2:social 3:pin 4:social or pin -f Configure facebook login. 0: disable. 1: enable. -g Configure google login. 0: disable. 1: enable. -h Enable HTTPS redirection. 0: disable. 1: enable. -v Enable portal detection. 0: disable. 1: enable. -i Configure APP id. For example, to configure facebook APP id, you can type: >hsportal -p 1 -f -i this_is_app_id Profile 1 set facebook login disabled ... [OK] -k Configure app key.
Telnet Command: wl acl This command allows the user to configure wireless access control settings. Syntax wl acl enable [ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4] wl acl disable [ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4] wl acl add [MAC] [ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4] [isolate] wl acl del [MAC] wl acl mode [ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4] [white/black] wl acl show wl acl showmode wl acl clean Syntax Description Parameter Description enable [ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4] It means to enable the settings for SSID1, SSID2, SSID3 and SSID4.
Index 0 1 Attribute s MAC Address 00:50:70:ff:12:70 00:50:70:ff:12:70 Associated SSIDs ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4 ssid1 ssid2 s: Isolate the station from LAN > Telnet Command: wl config This command allows users to configure general settings and security settings for wireless connection.
hidden_ssid: Type 0 to hide the SSID or 1 to display the SSID Security [SSID_NUMBER] [mode][key][index] It means to configure security settings for the wirelesss connection. SSID_NUMBER: Type 1, 2, 3 or 4 to specify SSID1, SSID2, SSID3 or SSID4. mode: Available settings are: disable: No security. wpa1x: WPA/802.1x Only wpa21x: WPA2/802.1x Only wpamix1x: Mixed (WPA+WPA2/802.1x only) wep1x: WEP/802.
%% (Telnet Command: wl restart) Telnet Command: wl set This command allows users to configure basic wireless settings. Syntax wl set [SSID] [CHAN[En]] wl set txburst [enable] Syntax Description Parameter Description SSID It means to type the SSID for the router. The maximum character that you can use is 32. CHAN[En] It means to specify required channel for the router. CHAN: The range for the number is between 1 ~ 13. En: type on to enable the function; type off to disable the function.
Syntax wl scan [start] wl scan set [wlist/blist/stime][MAC] wl scan del [wlist/blist] [MAC] wl scan filter [ssid/channel/mac] wl scan show [0/1/2/3] Syntax Description Parameter Description start It means to start AP scanning. set [wlist/blist/stime] [MAC] Set white list/block list/scan time. wlist – It means to set white list for passing. MAC address must be added in the end. e.g., wl scan set wlist 001122aabbcc blist – It means to set black list for blocking. MAC address must be added in the end.
Parameter Description enable/disable It means to enable/disable the station management control. ssid_num It means channel selection. Available channel for 2.4G: 0/1/2/3 Available channel for 5G: 4/5/6/7. show It means to display status or configuration of the selected channel. c It means connection time. The unit is minute. r It means reconnection time. The unit is minute. Example > wl stamgt enable 1 % Station Management Status: enabled > wl stamgt set 1 60 60 > wl stamgt show 1 NO.
1 – means WPA+WPA2 2 – means WPA2 Only 3 – means WPA Only Example > wl wpa 1 > Telnet Command: wl wmm This command allows users to set WMM for wireless connection. It defines the priority levels for four access categories derived from 802.1d (prioritization tabs).
> wl wmm ap 0 3 4 6 0 0 QueIdx=0: APAifsn=3,APCwmin=4,APCwmax=6, APTxop=0,APACM=0 > wl wmm enable 1 0 1 0 WMM_SSID0 =1, WMM_SSID1 =0,WMM_SSID2 =1,WMM_SSID3 =0 > wl wmm show Enable WMM: SSID0 =1, SSID1 =0,SSID2 =1,SSID3 =0 APSD=0 QueIdx=0: APAifsn=3,APCwmin=4,APCwmax=6, APTxop=0,APACM=0 QueIdx=1: APAifsn=7,APCwmin=4,APCwmax=10, APTxop=0,APACM=0 QueIdx=2: APAifsn=1,APCwmin=3,APCwmax=4, APTxop=94,APACM=0 QueIdx=3: APAifsn=1,APCwmin=2,APCwmax=3, APTxop=47,APACM=0 QueIdx=0: BSSAifsn=3,BSSCwmin=4,BSSCwmax=10, BSS
Telnet Command: wl ht This command allows you to configure wireless settings. Syntax wl ht bw value wl ht gi value wl ht badecline value wl ht autoba value wl ht rdg value wl ht msdu value wl ht txpower value wl ht antenna value wl ht greenfield value Syntax Description Parameter Description wl ht bw value The value you can type is 0 (for BW_20) and 1 (for BW_40).
Telnet Command: wl restart This command allows you to restart wireless setting. Example > wl restart Wireless restart................ Telnet Command: wl wds This command allows you to configure WDS settings. Syntax wl wds mode [value] wl wds security [value] wl wds ap [value] wl wds hello [value] wl wds status wl wds show wl wds mac [value] wl wds flush Syntax Description Parameter Description mode [value] It means to specify connection mode for WDS.
0 – disable the function. status It means to display WDS link status for 2.4GHz connection. show It means to display current WDS settings. mac add [index addr] add [index addr] – Add the peer MAC entry in Repeater/Bridge WDS MAC table. mac clear/disable/enable [index/all] clear/disable/enable [index/all]- Clear, disable, enable the specifed or all MAC entries in Repeater/Bridge WDS MAC table. e.g, wl dual wds mac enable 1 flush It means to reset all WDS setting.
WEP keys must be in 5/13 ASCII string or 10/26 Hexadecimal digit format. ssid [ssid_name] Specify the SSID for wireless 2.4GHz AP client. bssid Type the MAC address for wireless 2.4GHz AP client.
Telnet Command: wl set8021x This command allows you to configure the external or internal server used by Vigor router for wireless authentication. Syntax wl set8021x –t [0/1] wl set8021x –v Syntax Description Parameter Description -t Specify the type (external or internal) of wireless authentication server. 0 – Indicate the external RADIUS server. 1- Indicate the local 802.1x server. -v View the settings of 802.1x.
> wl bndstrg chk_time 50 30 argv[0]:chk_time, argv[1]:50, argv[2]:30 %% Wireless card must be reset for configurations to take effect %% (Telnet Command: wl restart) Telnet Command: wl artfns This command allows users to configure airtime fairness function for wireless (2.4GHz) connection. Syntax wl artfns enable [value] wl artfns trg_num [value] wl artfns show Syntax Description Parameter Description enable [value] It means to enable wireless airtime fairness function.
rs_low_security – Set a value of Minimum RSSI (62~86). delta – Set a value of Adjacent AP RSSI (1~20). restart Restart to activate roaming function. show Dispaly current configuration of roaming function. Example > % % % % > wl drayrs show Mode : Disable rs_low : -73 rs_low_secure : -66 delta : 5 Telnet Command: wl_dual acl This command allows the user to configure wireless (5GHz) access control settings.
clear It means to clear all of the access control settings.
Telnet Command: wl_dual cardmac Example > wl_dual cardmac Card MAC: 54:2a:a2:37:00:ef Telnet Command: wl_dual config This command allows users to configure general settings and security settings for wireless connection (5GHz).
Most modern wireless network uses short preamble with 56 bit sync field instead of long preamble with 128 bit sync field. However, some original 11b wireless network devices only support long preamble. 0: disable to use long preamble. 1: enable to use long preamble. preamble show It means to display if preamble is enabled or not. ssid[ssid_num enable ssid_name] It means to set the name of the SSID, hide the SSID if required. ssid_num: Type 1, 2, 3 or 4 to specify SSID1, SSID2, SSID3 or SSID4.
> wl_dual config ssid 1 enable dray SSID Enable Hide_SSID Name 1 1 0 dray % Please restart 5G wireless after you set the parameters. > wl_dual config ssid show SSID Enable Hide_SSID Name 1 1 0 dray 2 0 0 DrayTek_5G_Guest 3 0 0 4 0 0 Telnet Command: wl_dual restart This command allows you to restart wireless setting (5GHz). Example > wl_dual restart 5G wireless restart................
Example > wl_dual security 1 wpa2psk 123456789e % Please restart 5G wireless after you set the parameters. > wl_dual security show %% 5G Wireless LAN Security Settings: % SSID1 %% Mode: WPA2/PSK % SSID2 %% Mode: Disable % SSID3 %% Mode: Disable % SSID4 %% Mode: Disable Telnet Command: wl_dual stalist This command is used to display the wireless station which accessing Internet via Vigor router.
wl_dual wds show wl_dual wds mac add [index addr] wl_dual wds mac clear/disable/enable [index/all] wl_dual wds flush Syntax Description Parameter Description mode [value] It means to specify connection mode for WDS. [value]: Available settings are : d: Disable b: Bridge r: Repeapter security [value] It means to configure security mode with encrypted keys for WDS. mode: Available settings are: disable: No security.
> > > wl_dual wds show 5G Wireless WDS Setting Mode : Bridge Security : WEP AP Function : Enable Send Hello Function : Enable Bridge Index 1 2 3 4 : Enable MAC Address 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 Repeater : Index Enable MAC Address 5 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 6 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 7 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 8 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 > wl_dual wds wep 12345 % Please restart router after you set the parameters.
> wl_dual wps pin 88563337 WPS has triggered by PIN code. The AP will wait for WPS request from your client for 2 minutes... Telnet Command: wl_dual set8021x This command allows you to configure the external or internal server used by Vigor router for wireless authentication (5GHz). Syntax wl_dual set8021x –t [0/1] wWl_dual set8021x –v Syntax Description Parameter Description -t Specify the type (external or internal) of wireless authentication server. 0 – Indicate the external RADIUS server.
must be in 8~63 ASCII string or 64 Hexadecimal digit format. wpa2psk [key] – WPA2 Pre-shared Key will be used. Keys must start with 0x to be identified as a Hexadecimal number key. WPA keys must be in 8~63 ASCII string or 64 Hexadecimal digit format. wpamixpsk [key] – WPA Mixed Pre-shared Key will be used. Keys must start with 0x to be identified as a Hexadecimal number key. WPA keys must be in 8~63 ASCII string or 64 Hexadecimal digit format. wep [key] [index] – WEP key will be used.
Example > wl_dual artfns airtime fairness trg_num: 2 > wl_dual artfns airtime fairness show for 5G: disable > wl_dual artfns > wl_dual artfns > wl_dual artfns airtime fairness trg_num: 2 > wl_dual artfns airtime fairness enable 0 trg_num 2 show for 5G: disable status for 5G is disabled !!! status for 5G is disabled !!! Telnet Command: wl_dual drayrs This command allows the user to configure settings for Roaming for wireless clients.
Syntax radius enable [0/1] radius authport [port number] radius set_auth_method [method idx] radius client [add] [idx] -i [address] -m [mask] -p [prefix] -l [length] -s [secret] radius client [del] [idx] radius show radius set_dot1x_phase1 -e [method_idx] radius set_dot1x_phase1 -d [method_idx] radius set_dot1x_phase2 -e [method_idx] radius set_dot1x_phase2 -d [method_idx] Syntax Description Parameter Description enable[0/1] Enable (1) or disable (0) the RADIUS server.
This setting will take effect after rebooting. Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router. Telnet Command: local_8021x The command is used to configure general settings for Local 802.1X server built in Vigor router. Syntax local_8021x enable [0/1] local_8021x set_localdot1x_phase1 options... local_8021x set_localdot1x_phase2 options... local_8021x show Syntax Description Parameter Description enable Enable or disable the configuration. 0: disable. 1: enable.
Parameter Description MAC Address It means the MAC address of the host. IP address It means the LAN IP address of the host. If you want to wake up LAN host by using IP address, be sure that that IP address has been bound with the MAC address (IP BindMAC). on/off/any It means to enable or disable the function of WOL from WAN. on: enable off: disable any: It means any source IP address can pass through NAT and wake up the LAN client.
Telnet Command: user The command is used to create new user account profiles. Syntax sser set [-e|-d|-c|-l|-o|-a|-r|-b] user edit [PROFILE_IDX] [-e|-d|-n|-p|-t|-u|-i|-q|-r|-w|-s|-m|-x|-v] user account [USER_NAME] [-t|-d|-q|-r|-w] Syntax Description Parameter Description set It means to configure general setup for the user management. edit It means to modify the selected user profile. account It means to set time and data quota for specified user account.
PROFILE_IDX Type the index number of the profile that you want to edit. -e Enable User profile function. -d Disable User profile function. -n It means to set a user name for a profile. e.g.,-n fortest -p It means to configure user password. e.g., -p 60fortest -t It means to enable /disable time quota limitation for user profile 0:Disable 1:Enable -u It means to enable /disable data quota limitation for user profile 0:Disable 1:Enable -i It means to set idle time. e.g.
Example > user account admin -d 1 Enable the [admin] data quota limited Telnet Command: appqos The command is used to configure QoS for APP. Syntax appqos view appqos enable [0/1] appqos traceable [-v | -e AP_INDEX CLASS | -d AP_INDEX] appqos untraceable [-v | -e AP_INDEX CLASS | -d AP_INDEX] Syntax Description Parameter Description view It means to display current status of APP QoS. enable[0/1] It means to enable or disable the function of APP QoS.
nand usage Example >nand usage Show NAND Flash Usage: Partition Total Used cfg 4194304 7920 bin_web 33554432 11869493 cfg-bak 4194304 7920 bin_web-bak 33554432 11869493 > nand bad Show NAND Flash Bad Blocks: Block Address Partition 1020 0x07f80000 unused 1021 0x07fa0000 unused 1022 0x07fc0000 unused 1023 0x07fe0000 unused Available 4186384 21684939 4186384 21684939 Use% 0% 35% 0% 35% Telnet Command: apm show /clear/discover/query The apm command(s) is use to display, remove, discover or query the inform
apm profile del [index] apm profile reset apm profile summary apm profile [show [profile index]] apm profile apply [profile index] [client index1 [index2 .. index5]] Syntax Description Parameter Description clone It is used to copy the same parameters settings from one profile to another APM profile. del It is used to delete a specified APM profile. The default (index #1) should not be deleted. reset It is used to reset to factory settings for WLAN profile.
apm cache [show] apm cache clear Syntax Description Parameter Description show It means to display the information related to VigorAP registered Vigor2862. clear It means to remove the information related to VigorAP registered Vigor2862. Example > apm cache show MAC Name Auth ------------ -------------------- -------------------> Telnet Command: apm lbcfg This command allows to set parameters related to AP management control.
1 – enable disassociation, 0 – disable disassociation. [8] – The eighth number means to enable or disable disassociation by signal strength. Type 1 – enable disassociation, 0 – disable disassociation. [9] – The ninth number means to determine the unit of traffic limit (for upload) 1 – Mbps 0 – kbps [10] – The tenth number means to determine the unit of traffic limit (for download) 1 – Mbps 0 – kbps Example > apm lbcfg show apm LoadBalance Config : 1. Enable LoadBalance : 0 2. Enable station limit : 0 3.
Syntax Description Parameter Description get It is used to get AP detection data from VigorAP (e.g., AP900). set It allows to set detect configuration to VigorAP. enable/disable AP Detection 1/0 It is used to enable or disable the AP detection function. 0 – disable the function. 1 – enable the function. Refresh Time Available values are 1, 3 or 5 (minutes). Example Note: To check the scanning result of AP detection, use the command of “wl scan show”.
Example > apm syslog "2015-11-04 12:24:21", "[APM] [VigorAP900_01daa902080] Get Rogue AP Data from AP" 2015-11-04 12:24:56", "[APM] [VigorAP900_01daa902080] Get Rogue AP Data from AP Success" 2015-11-04 12:34:21", "[APM] [VigorAP900_01daa902080] Get Rogue AP Data from AP" 2015-11-04 12:34:57", "[APM] [VigorAP900_01daa902080] Get Rogue AP Data from AP Success" Detection Detection Detection Detection Telnet Command: apm stanum This command is used to display the total number of the wireless clients, no matt
1: Active-Standby 0: Hot-Standby -v <1-255> Specify the group ID (VHID) 1- 255: Setting range. -R Set HA settings to Factory Default. -p <1-30> Specify the Priority ID. 1-30: Setting range. -k Specify the Authentication Key. Key: Max. 31 Characters. -u <1/0> Enable or disable the function of Update DDNS. 1: Enable. When a router changes HA status to primary, it will update DDNS automatically. 0: Disable. -m Specify the management interface. Interface: LAN1 ~ LAN6, DMZ.
Syntax ha show –c ha show –g Syntax Description Parameter Description -c Show the settings of config sync. -g Show the settings of general setup. Example > ha show -g % High Availability : Disable % Redundancy Method : Active-Standby % Group ID : 1 % Priority ID : 10 % Preempt Mode : Enable % Update DDNS : Disable % Management Interface : LAN1 % Authentication Key : draytek % Syslog : OFF % % [ Index | Enable | Virtual IP ] % LAN1 On 192.168.1.0 % LAN2 0.0.0.0 % LAN3 0.0.0.0 % LAN4 0.0.0.0 % LAN5 0.
% % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % High Availability : ! Disable Redundancy Method : Active-Standby Group ID : 1 Priority ID : 10 Update DDNS : Disable Protocol : IPv4 Management Interface: LAN1 Authentication Key : draytek Virtual IP: (Max. 7 Virtual IPs) ON LAN1 192.168.1.0 Virtual IPv6: (Max.
Parameter Description LAN_port Specify the LAN port number (1 to 6). Example > swm get 1 Start get cfg from LAN (1) external switch Please wait a few seconds... Result: [OK]. > Telnet Command: swm post This command is used to transfer switch configuration to VigorSwitch which connecting to Vigor router in LAN. Syntax swm post [LAN_port] Syntax Description Parameter Description LAN_port Specify the LAN port number (1 to 6).
Syntax swm extvlan [LAN_Port][VLAN_idx][Port_Description] Syntax Description Parameter LAN_Port VLAN_idx Port_Description Description Setting range is from 1 to 6. Index number range for VLAN is from 0 to 7. Setting range is from 1 to 24. Example > swm extvlan 1 1 13 Set OK. > swm post 1 Start post cfg to LAN (1) external switch with currect settings.//post cfg Please wait a few seconds... Result: [OK]. System will cover the original VLAN settings on your VigorSwitch.
Index Advance Mode, 432 ３ 3G/4G USB Modem, 65 3G/4G USB Modem (DHCP mode), 57 3G/4G USB Modem (PPP mode), 56 Advanced Mode, 279 Advanced Setting, 307 Aggregation MSDU, 307 AH), 411 Airtime Fairness, 312 ６ 6rd Mode, 118 ake on LAN, 214 Always On, 70, 73, 96, 100, 110, 111, 112, 114, 115, 117, 119, 123 6rd Prefix, 118 Analyze, 446 6rd Prefix Length, 118 Anonymous, 208 AP Discovery, 101, 311 ８ 802.
Authentication Mode, 303 Call Filter, 424 Authentication Port, 205 Call Forward, 340 Authentication Type, 170 Call Forwarding, 332 Auto Adjustment, 310 Call Transfer, 343 Auto detect, 36 Call Waiting, 341 Auto Logout, 21 Certificate Backup, 422 Auto-Update interval, 190 Certificate Management, 415 Aux.
Days in a week, 201 DHCPv6 Server, 157 Default Lifetime, 158 Diagnose, 199, 258 Default MAC Address, 80, 83, 87, 94, 97 Diagnostic, 701 Default Preference, 158 Dial-out Triggering, 701 Default Rule, 428 DialPlan, 334 Destination IP, 254 Digit Map, 336 Details - PPPoE/PPPoA, 84 Digital Signature, 355, 374 Details Page, 76 Display Name, 71, 73, 76 Details-3G/4G USB Mdem(PPP mode), 102 DMZ Host, 179 Details-3G/4G USB Modem (DHCP mode), 106 DNS Cache Table, 707 Details-3G/4G USB Modem(DHCP m
Encapsulating, 88 GUI Map, 28 Encapsulating Type, 84 Encapsulation, 121, 125 End IPv6 Address, 157 End Port, 183 ESP, 365, 411 Event Code, 482 Event Log, 627 Extension WAN, 158 External Devices, 649 External RADIUS, 203 Ｈ Hardware Acceleration, 171 Hardware Installation, 11 Hide caller ID, 341 Hide SSID, 296 High Availability, 220 High Availability Status, 717 Host Name, 48, 49 Hot-Standby, 221 External TACACS+, 207 Ｆ Failover, 70, 71, 73 Failover to/Failback, 247 File Explorer, 689 File Extension Obje
IP Call, 327 LDAP / Active Directory, 413 IP Filters, 424 LDAP /Active Directory Setup, 187 IP Group, 657 Lease Time, 149, 152, 154 IP Object, 653 Line Speed, 68, 69, 71, 73 IP Pool Counts, 149, 152, 154 Load Balance, 70, 71, 73, 628 IPsec General Setup, 365 Load Balance for AP, 609 IPsec Peer Identity, 366 Load Balance Mode, 67 IPSec Tunnel, 409 Load-Balance, 253, 261 IPv4 Border Relay, 118 Load-Balance /Route Policy, 253 IPv4 Mask Length, 118 Local 802.
MBS, 127 Network Mode, 105, 107 Mic Gain, 345 Notification Object, 676 Min/Max Interval Time, 158 NS Detect, 114 Minimum Keep Alive Period, 482 Mirror Port, 169 Mode, 292, 298 Modem Code Upgrade, 512 Modem Dial String, 103 Modem Initial String, 56, 103 Modem Initial String2, 103 Ｏ Objects Settings, 652 Online Statistics, 524 OP Number, 337 Open Ports, 182 Option Number, 76 Modem Setting (for ADSL only), 77, 81 Modem Settings, 84 Modem Settings (for ADSL only), 88 Ｐ Modem Support List, 102, 105, 69
PING Interval, 97 PSTN Setup, 341 Ping IP/Hostname, 110, 111, 112, 114, 115, 117, 119 Public IP Address, 65 Ping Retry, 78, 82, 85, 90, 92, 96, 100, 103, 105, 108, 122 Public Port, 177 Policy, 542 Push Button, 303 Port Redirection, 175 PVC to PVC Binding, 127 Port Triggering, 184, 186 Port-Based VLAN, 161 PPP Authentication, 79, 86, 93, 99, 103, 123 PPP General Setup, 363 PPP Password, 103 PPP Setup, 99 PPP Username, 103 PPPoE, 42 Ｑ QoS Type, 122, 126, 127 Quality of Service, 517, 523 Query Serve
Ring Port, 332 Service, 185 RIP Protocol, 83, 91, 97 Service Activation Wizard, 58 RIPng Protocol, 110, 114, 116, 158 Service API, 191 Rogue AP, 626 Service Name, 37, 92, 103, 177 Rogue AP Detection, 624 Service Provider, 191, 193, 672 Root CA, 420 Service Type, 191 Route Policy, 247 Service Type Group, 664 Router Advertisement Configuration, 158 Service Type Object, 662 Router Commands, 282 Sesseion Based, 67 Router Name, 95, 495 Sessions Control, 428 Routing, 247 Sessions Limit, 517,
SSL Tunnel, 409 TACACS+, 413 SSL VPN, 406 Tag value, 35, 70, 72 Start IP Address, 149, 152, 154 Tagged VLAN, 161 Start IPv6 Address, 157 TCP.
URL Content Filter, 429, 452 VPN and Remote Access, 350 URL Content Filter Profile, 457 VPN Backup, 387 USB, 56 VPN Client Wizard, 351 USB Application, 685 VPN Dial-Out Through, 355 USB Device Status, 690 VPN Graph, 713 USB General Settings, 686 VPN Load Balance, 387 USB User Management, 687 VPN Management, 598 User Account, 408 VPN Server Wizard, 358 User Group, 412, 545 VPN Trunk Management, 387 User Management, 537 User Online Status, 546 User Password, 486 User Profile, 206, 225, 540 U
Wildcard, 192 WLAN Profile, 612 Wired 802.1x, 170 WMM Capable, 308 Wireless 2.
